diff options
| author | Dean Camera <dean@fourwalledcubicle.com> | 2011-07-15 08:46:08 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Dean Camera <dean@fourwalledcubicle.com> | 2011-07-15 08:46:08 +0000 |
| commit | 0c2ad9eb349e1a5676468af3b407329dde4a53b4 (patch) | |
| tree | b3e3ee89775704f827926613b9924d927e06acd5 | |
| parent | a36012fc4b057dc1fe96f75a005cd8ba017a6a71 (diff) | |
| download | lufa-0c2ad9eb349e1a5676468af3b407329dde4a53b4.tar.gz lufa-0c2ad9eb349e1a5676468af3b407329dde4a53b4.tar.bz2 lufa-0c2ad9eb349e1a5676468af3b407329dde4a53b4.zip | |
Add missing SVN eol-style property to files where it was missing.
105 files changed, 27742 insertions, 27742 deletions
diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c index 4a439544f..f4cb0f1a1 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c @@ -1,164 +1,164 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Main source file for the HID class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
- */
-
-#include "BootloaderHID.h"
-
-/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
- * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
- * started via a forced watchdog reset.
- */
-static bool RunBootloader = true;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
- * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- /* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
- SetupHardware();
-
- /* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
- sei();
-
- while (RunBootloader)
- USB_USBTask();
-
- /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
- USB_Detach();
-
- /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
- wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
-
- for (;;);
-}
-
-/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
- MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
- MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
-
- /* Initialize USB subsystem */
- USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
- * to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
- /* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
- Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
- ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_IN_EPSIZE,
- ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
- * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
- * internally.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
-{
- /* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the HID interface */
- if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
- (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
- {
- return;
- }
-
- /* Process HID specific control requests */
- switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
- {
- case HID_REQ_SetReport:
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */
- while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
-
- /* Read in the write destination address */
- #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
- uint32_t PageAddress = ((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() << 8);
- #else
- uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
- #endif
-
- /* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
- #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
- if ((uint16_t)(PageAddress >> 8) == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
- #else
- if (PageAddress == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
- #endif
- {
- RunBootloader = false;
- }
- else
- {
- /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
- boot_page_erase(PageAddress);
- boot_spm_busy_wait();
-
- /* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
- for (uint8_t PageWord = 0; PageWord < (SPM_PAGESIZE / 2); PageWord++)
- {
- /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
- if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
- {
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
- while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
- }
-
- /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
- boot_page_fill(PageAddress + ((uint16_t)PageWord << 1), Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
- }
-
- /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
- boot_page_write(PageAddress);
- boot_spm_busy_wait();
-
- /* Re-enable RWW section */
- boot_rww_enable();
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- break;
- }
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the HID class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#include "BootloaderHID.h" + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +static bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */ + sei(); + + while (RunBootloader) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */ + USB_Detach(); + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + /* Setup HID Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_IN_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + /* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the HID interface */ + if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) != + (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + return; + } + + /* Process HID specific control requests */ + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case HID_REQ_SetReport: + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the write destination address */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + uint32_t PageAddress = ((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() << 8); + #else + uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_16_LE(); + #endif + + /* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */ + #if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF) + if ((uint16_t)(PageAddress >> 8) == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION) + #else + if (PageAddress == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION) + #endif + { + RunBootloader = false; + } + else + { + /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */ + boot_page_erase(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */ + for (uint8_t PageWord = 0; PageWord < (SPM_PAGESIZE / 2); PageWord++) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(PageAddress + ((uint16_t)PageWord << 1), Endpoint_Read_16_LE()); + } + + /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h index 30624a1eb..190dff857 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h @@ -1,61 +1,61 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for TeensyHID.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_
-#define _TEENSYHID_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/wdt.h>
- #include <avr/boot.h>
- #include <avr/power.h>
- #include <avr/interrupt.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
-
- #include "Descriptors.h"
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Bootloader special address to start the user application */
- #define COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void SetupHardware(void);
-
- void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TeensyHID.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_ +#define _TEENSYHID_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/boot.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Bootloader special address to start the user application */ + #define COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt index d69582212..a774ab485 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt @@ -1,88 +1,88 @@ -/** \file
- *
- * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
- *
- * \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
- * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
- * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
- * - Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
- *
- * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
- *
- * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- * <td>Device</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- * <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- * <td>N/A</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- * <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n
- * Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- * <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- * Full Speed Mode</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
- *
- * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for device FLASH programming through
- * the supplied command line software, which is a modified version of Paul's TeensyHID Command Line loader code
- * from PJRC (used with permission). This bootloader is deliberatley non-compatible with the properietary PJRC
- * HalfKay bootloader GUI; only the command line interface software accompanying this bootloader will work with it.
- *
- * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 2KB of bootloader space for the
- * Series 2 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU2, AT90USBxx2) or 4KB of bootloader space for all other models. If you wish to
- * enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU values in the
- * accompanying makefile.
- *
- * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
- *
- * This bootloader uses the HID class driver inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional drivers
- * need to be supplied for correct operation.
- *
- * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
- *
- * Due to licensing issues, the supplied bootloader is compatible with the HalfKay bootloader protocol designed
- * by PJRC, but is non-compatible with the cross-platform loader GUI. A modified version of the open source
- * cross-platform TeensyLoader application is supplied, which can be compiled under most operating systems. The
- * command-line loader application should remain compatible with genuine Teensy boards in addition to boards using
- * this custom bootloader.
- *
- * Once compiled, programs can be loaded into the AVR's FLASH memory through the following example command:
- * \code
- * hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=at90usb1287 Mouse.hex
- * \endcode
- *
- * \section SSec_Options Project Options
- *
- * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td>
- * None
- * </td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- */
+/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage HID Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * - Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n + * Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for device FLASH programming through + * the supplied command line software, which is a modified version of Paul's TeensyHID Command Line loader code + * from PJRC (used with permission). This bootloader is deliberatley non-compatible with the properietary PJRC + * HalfKay bootloader GUI; only the command line interface software accompanying this bootloader will work with it. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 2KB of bootloader space for the + * Series 2 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU2, AT90USBxx2) or 4KB of bootloader space for all other models. If you wish to + * enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU values in the + * accompanying makefile. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation + * + * This bootloader uses the HID class driver inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional drivers + * need to be supplied for correct operation. + * + * \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application + * + * Due to licensing issues, the supplied bootloader is compatible with the HalfKay bootloader protocol designed + * by PJRC, but is non-compatible with the cross-platform loader GUI. A modified version of the open source + * cross-platform TeensyLoader application is supplied, which can be compiled under most operating systems. The + * command-line loader application should remain compatible with genuine Teensy boards in addition to boards using + * this custom bootloader. + * + * Once compiled, programs can be loaded into the AVR's FLASH memory through the following example command: + * \code + * hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=at90usb1287 Mouse.hex + * \endcode + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c index fef43ab94..f01322c8e 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c @@ -1,186 +1,186 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
- * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- * the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
- * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
- * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
- * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
- * more details on HID report descriptors.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
-{
- HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFFDC), /* Vendor Page 0xDC */
- HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xFB), /* Vendor Usage 0xFB */
- HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */
- HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */
- HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
- HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),
- HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
- HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(16, (sizeof(uint16_t) + SPM_PAGESIZE)),
- HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
- HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
-};
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- * process begins.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
- .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
- .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
- .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
- .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
-
- .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
- .VendorID = 0x03EB,
- .ProductID = 0x2067,
- .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01),
-
- .ManufacturerStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
- .ProductStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
- .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
- .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
- .Config =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
- .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
- .TotalInterfaces = 1,
-
- .ConfigurationNumber = 1,
- .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
- .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
-
- .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
- },
-
- .HID_Interface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 0x00,
- .AlternateSetting = 0x00,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 1,
-
- .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
- .SubClass = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
- .Protocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .HID_VendorHID =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
-
- .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(01.11),
- .CountryCode = 0x00,
- .TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
- .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report,
- .HIDReportLength = sizeof(HIDReport)
- },
-
- .HID_ReportINEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_IN_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = HID_IN_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- * USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
- const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
-
- const void* Address = NULL;
- uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
- /* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
- if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
- {
- Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
- }
- else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
- {
- Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
- }
- else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_HID)
- {
- Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID;
- Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
- }
- else
- {
- Address = &HIDReport;
- Size = sizeof(HIDReport);
- }
-
- *DescriptorAddress = Address;
- return Size;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] = +{ + HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFFDC), /* Vendor Page 0xDC */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xFB), /* Vendor Usage 0xFB */ + HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */ + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00), + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF), + HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08), + HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(16, (sizeof(uint16_t) + SPM_PAGESIZE)), + HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), + HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0), +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2067, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .ProductStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .HID_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 0x00, + .AlternateSetting = 0x00, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass, + .SubClass = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass, + .Protocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .HID_VendorHID = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID}, + + .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(01.11), + .CountryCode = 0x00, + .TotalReportDescriptors = 1, + .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report, + .HIDReportLength = sizeof(HIDReport) + }, + + .HID_ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_IN_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = HID_IN_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + /* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */ + if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device) + { + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration) + { + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + } + else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_HID) + { + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID; + Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + else + { + Address = &HIDReport; + Size = sizeof(HIDReport); + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h index b2fd88e71..eb231f03f 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h @@ -1,70 +1,70 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
- * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
- * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-
- // Generic HID Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface;
- USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_VendorHID;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint;
- } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */
- #define HID_IN_EPNUM 1
-
- /** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
- #define HID_IN_EPSIZE 64
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
- ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Generic HID Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface; + USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_VendorHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_IN_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_IN_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/HID/Doxygen.conf index 6f45fe408..b594b7289 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/Doxygen.conf +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/Doxygen.conf @@ -1,1566 +1,1566 @@ -# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - HID Class Bootloader"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
- "The $name widget" \
- "The $name file" \
- is \
- provides \
- specifies \
- contains \
- represents \
- a \
- an \
- the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
- *.c \
- *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \
- HostLoaderApp/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \
- INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \
- PROGMEM
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED =
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - HID Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, +# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English +# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, +# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, +# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses. +# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension. +# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag. +# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of +# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP, +# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat +# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran), +# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation +# rather than with sharp brackets. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. +# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \ + HostLoaderApp/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. +# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. +# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. +# The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. +# Otherwise they will link to the documentation. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting +# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add. +# For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's +# filter section matches. +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help +# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents +# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML +# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of +# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as +# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have +# this name. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser). +# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list. + +USE_INLINE_TREES = NO + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript +# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should +# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine +# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index +# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup +# and does not have live searching capabilities. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for +# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the +# Makefile that is written to the output directory. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. +# This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. +# On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/Bootloaders/HID/makefile b/Bootloaders/HID/makefile index dede899a6..179d87957 100644 --- a/Bootloaders/HID/makefile +++ b/Bootloaders/HID/makefile @@ -1,712 +1,712 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).
-ARCH = AVR8
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by
-# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-# software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_USB = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Starting byte address of the bootloader, as a byte address - computed via the formula
-# BOOT_START = ((FLASH_SIZE_KB - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) * 1024)
-#
-# Note that the bootloader size and start address given in AVRStudio is in words and not
-# bytes, and so will need to be doubled to obtain the byte address needed by AVR-GCC.
-FLASH_SIZE_KB = 128
-BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 4
-BOOT_START = 0x$(shell echo "obase=16; ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024" | bc)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = BootloaderHID
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens
-LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
-LUFA_OPTS += -D ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_SOF_EVENTS
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- Descriptors.c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=c99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START)
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program debug gdb-config checksource
-
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation). +ARCH = AVR8 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by +# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value +# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to +# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate +# software delays. +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_USB = $(F_CPU) + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader, as a byte address - computed via the formula +# BOOT_START = ((FLASH_SIZE_KB - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) * 1024) +# +# Note that the bootloader size and start address given in AVRStudio is in words and not +# bytes, and so will need to be doubled to obtain the byte address needed by AVR-GCC. +FLASH_SIZE_KB = 128 +BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = 4 +BOOT_START = 0x$(shell echo "obase=16; ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024" | bc) + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BootloaderHID + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../.. + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens +LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY +LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0 +LUFA_OPTS += -D ORDERED_EP_CONFIG +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1 +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL +LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER +LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_SOF_EVENTS + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=c99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program debug gdb-config checksource + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c index eaf80d9cb..bf6b35928 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c @@ -1,321 +1,321 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
- * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- * the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
- * port location).
- */
-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
- #warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
-#endif
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- * process begins.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
- .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
- .Class = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
- .SubClass = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
- .Protocol = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
-
- .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
- .VendorID = 0x03EB,
- .ProductID = 0x2068,
- .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01),
-
- .ManufacturerStrIndex = 0x01,
- .ProductStrIndex = 0x02,
- .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
-
- .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
- .Config =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
- .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
- .TotalInterfaces = 3,
-
- .ConfigurationNumber = 1,
- .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
- .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-
- .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
- },
-
- .CDC_IAD =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
-
- .FirstInterfaceIndex = 0,
- .TotalInterfaces = 2,
-
- .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
- .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
- .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
-
- .IADStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .CDC_CCI_Interface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 0,
- .AlternateSetting = 0,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 1,
-
- .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
- .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
- .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .CDC_Functional_Header =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
-
- .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
- },
-
- .CDC_Functional_ACM =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
-
- .Capabilities = 0x06,
- },
-
- .CDC_Functional_Union =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
-
- .MasterInterfaceNumber = 0,
- .SlaveInterfaceNumber = 1,
- },
-
- .CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF
- },
-
- .CDC_DCI_Interface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 1,
- .AlternateSetting = 0,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 2,
-
- .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
- .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
- .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-
- .CDC_DataInEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-
- .MS_Interface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 2,
- .AlternateSetting = 0,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 2,
-
- .Class = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
- .SubClass = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
- .Protocol = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .MS_DataInEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-
- .MS_DataOutEndpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- }
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- * Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- * Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(30), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = L"LUFA CDC and Mass Storage Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- * USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
- const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
- const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
- const void* Address = NULL;
- uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
- switch (DescriptorType)
- {
- case DTYPE_Device:
- Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
- break;
- case DTYPE_Configuration:
- Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
- break;
- case DTYPE_String:
- switch (DescriptorNumber)
- {
- case 0x00:
- Address = &LanguageString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
- break;
- case 0x01:
- Address = &ManufacturerString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
- break;
- case 0x02:
- Address = &ProductString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
- break;
- }
-
- break;
- }
-
- *DescriptorAddress = Address;
- return Size;
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as + * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL. + * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated + * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices + * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value + * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and + * port location). + */ +#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR) + #warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor. +#endif + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10), + .Class = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2068, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = 0x01, + .ProductStrIndex = 0x02, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 3, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_IAD = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + .FirstInterfaceIndex = 0, + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .IADStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 0, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = 0, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = 1, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 1, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, + + .MS_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 2, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass, + .SubClass = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass, + .Protocol = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MS_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, + + .MS_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(30), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = L"LUFA CDC and Mass Storage Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h index 3beea74b9..594b65bb9 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h @@ -1,104 +1,104 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
- #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 1
-
- /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
- #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 2
-
- /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
- #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 3
-
- /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
- #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
-
- /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
- #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16
-
- /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
- #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM 4
-
- /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
- #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM 5
-
- /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
- #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
- * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
- * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-
- // CDC Control Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD;
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface;
- USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header;
- USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM;
- USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
-
- // CDC Data Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint;
-
- // Mass Storage Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MS_Interface;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataInEndpoint;
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataOutEndpoint;
- } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
- ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM 4 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM 5 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Control Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + + // Mass Storage Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MS_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf index bc4360c62..767874f71 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf @@ -1,1565 +1,1565 @@ -# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Device Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
- "The $name widget" \
- "The $name file" \
- is \
- provides \
- specifies \
- contains \
- represents \
- a \
- an \
- the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
- *.c \
- *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \
- INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \
- PROGMEM
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED =
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, +# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English +# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, +# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, +# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses. +# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension. +# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag. +# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of +# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP, +# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat +# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran), +# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation +# rather than with sharp brackets. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. +# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. +# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. +# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. +# The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. +# Otherwise they will link to the documentation. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting +# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add. +# For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's +# filter section matches. +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help +# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents +# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML +# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of +# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as +# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have +# this name. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser). +# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list. + +USE_INLINE_TREES = NO + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript +# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should +# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine +# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index +# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup +# and does not have live searching capabilities. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for +# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the +# Makefile that is written to the output directory. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. +# This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. +# On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf index 505e4f07b..dc90ffae0 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf @@ -1,106 +1,106 @@ -;************************************************************
-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-
-[Version]
-Signature="$Windows NT$"
-Class=Ports
-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
-Provider=%MFGNAME%
-LayoutFile=layout.inf
-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
-
-[DestinationDirs]
-DefaultDestDir=12
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.nt]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
-usbser.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
-
-[DriverService.nt]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; Vista-64bit Sections
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
-include=mdmcpq.inf
-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
-
-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
-
-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
-
-[DriverService.NTamd64]
-DisplayName=%SERVICE%
-ServiceType=1
-StartType=3
-ErrorControl=1
-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; Vendor and Product ID Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below.
-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[SourceDisksFiles]
-[SourceDisksNames]
-[DeviceList]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
-
-[DeviceList.NTamd64]
-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
-
-
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-; String Definitions
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-;Modify these strings to customize your device
-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-[Strings]
-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
-MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mass Storage Driver Installer"
-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
+;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat +DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64 + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[DriverInstall.nt] +include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt +AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg + +[DriverCopyFiles.nt] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[DriverInstall.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt + +[DriverService.nt] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vista-64bit Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[DriverInstall.NTamd64] +include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64 +AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg + +[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64] +%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20 + +[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64 + +[DriverService.NTamd64] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys + + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[SourceDisksFiles] +[SourceDisksNames] +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00 + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00 + + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista" +DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser" +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mass Storage Driver Installer" +DESCRIPTION="Communications Port" SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c index 64573520a..f962729dc 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c @@ -1,534 +1,534 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
- * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
- * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
- * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
- */
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
-#include "DataflashManager.h"
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
- * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
- * them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence
- * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
- uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
- bool UsingSecondBuffer = false;
-
- /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
- /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
- /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
- /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
- if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
- return;
-
- while (TotalBlocks)
- {
- uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
- /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
- while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
- if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- {
- /* Clear the current endpoint bank */
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
- /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
- if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
- return;
- }
-
- /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
- if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
- /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
- CurrDFPage++;
-
- /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
- if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
- UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
- /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
- /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
- if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- }
-#endif
-
- /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
- }
-
- /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
- Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
-
- /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
- /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
- BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
- /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
- if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
- return;
- }
-
- /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
- TotalBlocks--;
- }
-
- /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
- /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
- if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
- /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
- * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
- * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence
- * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks)
-{
- uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
- /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
- /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
- /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
- if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
- return;
-
- while (TotalBlocks)
- {
- uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
- /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
- while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
- if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- {
- /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
- if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
- return;
- }
-
- /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
- if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
- CurrDFPage++;
-
- /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
- /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- }
-
- /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
- Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
-
- /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
- /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
- BytesInBlockDiv16++;
-
- /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
- if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
- return;
- }
-
- /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
- TotalBlocks--;
- }
-
- /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
- if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
- * the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
- * Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
- * Dataflash.
- *
- * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence
- * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write
- * \param[in] BufferPtr Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks,
- uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
- uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
- bool UsingSecondBuffer = false;
-
- /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
- /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-#endif
-
- /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
-
- while (TotalBlocks)
- {
- uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
- /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
- while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
- if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
-
- /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
- CurrDFPage++;
-
- /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
- if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
- UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
-
- /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
- /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
- if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- }
-#endif
-
- /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
- Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
- }
-
- /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
- for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
- Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
-
- /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
- /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
- BytesInBlockDiv16++;
- }
-
- /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
- TotalBlocks--;
- }
-
- /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
- Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
- Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
-
- /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
- * the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
- * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
- * the files stored on the Dataflash.
- *
- * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence
- * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read
- * \param[out] BufferPtr Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
- */
-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks,
- uint8_t* BufferPtr)
-{
- uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
- uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
-
- /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
- /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
-
- while (TotalBlocks)
- {
- uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
-
- /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
- while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
- if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
- {
- /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
- CurrDFPage++;
-
- /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
- Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
-
- /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
- Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
- }
-
- /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
- for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
- *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
-
- /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
- CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
-
- /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
- BytesInBlockDiv16++;
- }
-
- /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
- TotalBlocks--;
- }
-
- /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
-{
- /* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
- Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-
- /* Check if sector protection is enabled */
- if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
- {
- Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
- /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
- }
-
- /* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
- #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
- Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
-
- /* Check if sector protection is enabled */
- if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
- {
- Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
-
- /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-}
-
-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
- *
- * \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
- */
-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
-{
- uint8_t ReturnByte;
-
- /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
- Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
- ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
- /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
- if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
- return false;
-
- #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
- /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
- Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
- Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
- ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
- Dataflash_DeselectChip();
-
- /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
- if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
- return false;
- #endif
-
- return true;
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of + * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored + * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such + * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C +#include "DataflashManager.h" + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes + * them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the current endpoint bank */ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the + * Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the + * Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + * \param[in] BufferPtr Pointer to the data source RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++)); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read + * the files stored on the Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + * \param[out] BufferPtr Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */ +void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void) +{ + /* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + + /* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */ + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + #endif + + /* Deselect current Dataflash chip */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working. + * + * \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise + */ +bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnByte; + + /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + #endif + + return true; +} + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h index eac0653e0..0dc4d26be 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h @@ -1,85 +1,85 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for DataflashManager.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
-
- #include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
- #include "Descriptors.h"
-
- #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
- #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
- #endif
-
- /* Defines: */
- /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
- #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
-
- /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
- * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
- */
- #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512
-
- /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
- * change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
- */
- #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks);
- void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks);
- void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks,
- uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
- void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
- uint16_t TotalBlocks,
- uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
- void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
- bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DataflashManager.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ +#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + + #include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16) + #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) + + /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying + * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not + * change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void); + bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c index d7842c5f8..66b58a124 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c @@ -1,347 +1,347 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
- * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
- * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
- */
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
-#include "SCSI.h"
-
-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
- * features and capabilities.
- */
-static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
- {
- .DeviceType = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
- .PeripheralQualifier = 0,
-
- .Removable = true,
-
- .Version = 0,
-
- .ResponseDataFormat = 2,
- .NormACA = false,
- .TrmTsk = false,
- .AERC = false,
-
- .AdditionalLength = 0x1F,
-
- .SoftReset = false,
- .CmdQue = false,
- .Linked = false,
- .Sync = false,
- .WideBus16Bit = false,
- .WideBus32Bit = false,
- .RelAddr = false,
-
- .VendorID = "LUFA",
- .ProductID = "Dataflash Disk",
- .RevisionID = {'0','.','0','0'},
- };
-
-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
- * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
- */
-static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
- {
- .ResponseCode = 0x70,
- .AdditionalLength = 0x0A,
- };
-
-
-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
- * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
- * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise
- */
-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- bool CommandSuccess = false;
-
- /* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
- switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
- {
- case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
- break;
- case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
- case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
- case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
- /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
- CommandSuccess = true;
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
- break;
- default:
- /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
- SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
- break;
- }
-
- /* Check if command was successfully processed */
- if (CommandSuccess)
- {
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
- SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return true;
- }
-
- return false;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
- * and capabilities to the host.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- uint16_t AllocationLength = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
- uint16_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
-
- /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
- if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
- {
- /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
- SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return false;
- }
-
- Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
-
- /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
- Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
-
- /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
- * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
- uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
-
- Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
- Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
-
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
- * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
- uint32_t MediaBlockSize = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
-
- Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
- Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
-
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
- * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
- * supported.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
- if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
- {
- /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
- SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
- if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
- {
- /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
- SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
-
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
- * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
- * reading and writing of the data.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- * \param[in] IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const bool IsDataRead)
-{
- uint32_t BlockAddress;
- uint16_t TotalBlocks;
-
- /* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
- if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
- {
- /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
- SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
- BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
-
- /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
- TotalBlocks = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
-
- /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
- if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
- {
- /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
- SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
- SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
- SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
-
- return false;
- }
-
- #if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
- /* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
- BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
- #endif
-
- /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
- if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
- DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
- else
- DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
-
- /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
-
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
- * the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- /* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
- Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
- Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
- Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
- Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
- MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
-
- return true;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + .DeviceType = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK, + .PeripheralQualifier = 0, + + .Removable = true, + + .Version = 0, + + .ResponseDataFormat = 2, + .NormACA = false, + .TrmTsk = false, + .AERC = false, + + .AdditionalLength = 0x1F, + + .SoftReset = false, + .CmdQue = false, + .Linked = false, + .Sync = false, + .WideBus16Bit = false, + .WideBus32Bit = false, + .RelAddr = false, + + .VendorID = "LUFA", + .ProductID = "Dataflash Disk", + .RevisionID = {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + .ResponseCode = 0x70, + .AdditionalLength = 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise + */ +bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData)); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData)); + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1); + uint32_t MediaBlockSize = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE; + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the + * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is + * supported. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */ + if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2))) + { + /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */ + if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation())) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * \param[in] IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint32_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Check if the disk is write protected or not */ + if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT, + SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]); + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + TotalBlocks = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]); + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + #if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1) + /* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */ + BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS); + #endif + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + else + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about + * the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */ + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4; + + return true; +} diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h index 96c8d6a35..85f77c424 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h @@ -1,88 +1,88 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for SCSI.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _SCSI_H_
-#define _SCSI_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- #include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
- #include "Descriptors.h"
- #include "DataflashManager.h"
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
- * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
- * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
- *
- * \param[in] Key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
- * \param[in] Acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
- * \param[in] Aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
- */
- #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual) MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (Key); \
- SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (Acode); \
- SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); }MACROE
-
- /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
- #define DATA_READ true
-
- /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
- #define DATA_WRITE false
-
- /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
- #define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK 0x00
-
- /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
- #define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM 0x05
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
-
- #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
- static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
- static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
- static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
- static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
- static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
- const bool IsDataRead);
- static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param[in] Key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param[in] Acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param[in] Aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual) MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = (Key); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (Acode); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); }MACROE + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK 0x00 + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM 0x05 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead); + static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c index 810cfb8b8..975067fd4 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c @@ -1,213 +1,213 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Main source file for the VirtualSerialMassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
-
-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- * within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
- {
- .Config =
- {
- .ControlInterfaceNumber = 0,
-
- .DataINEndpointNumber = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
- .DataINEndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
- .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
- .DataOUTEndpointNumber = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
- .DataOUTEndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
- .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
- .NotificationEndpointNumber = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
- .NotificationEndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
- .NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
- },
- };
-
-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- * passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- * within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
- {
- .Config =
- {
- .InterfaceNumber = 2,
-
- .DataINEndpointNumber = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
- .DataINEndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
- .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
- .DataOUTEndpointNumber = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
- .DataOUTEndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
- .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
- .TotalLUNs = TOTAL_LUNS,
- },
- };
-
-/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
- * used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
- */
-static FILE USBSerialStream;
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- * setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- SetupHardware();
-
- /* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
- CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- sei();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- CheckJoystickMovement();
-
- /* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
- CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
-
- CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
- MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
- USB_USBTask();
- }
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Disable clock division */
- clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
- /* Hardware Initialization */
- LEDs_Init();
- Joystick_Init();
- SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
- Dataflash_Init();
- USB_Init();
-
- /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
- DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
-}
-
-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
-{
- uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
- char* ReportString = NULL;
- static bool ActionSent = false;
-
- if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
- ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
- else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
- ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
- else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
- ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
- else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
- ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
- else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
- ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
- else
- ActionSent = false;
-
- if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
- {
- ActionSent = true;
-
- /* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
- fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
-
- /* Alternatively, without the stream: */
- // CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
- }
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
- bool ConfigSuccess = true;
-
- ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
- ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
-{
- CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
- MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
-}
-
-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
- *
- * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
- */
-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
-{
- bool CommandSuccess;
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
- CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-
- return CommandSuccess;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the VirtualSerialMassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h" + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = 0, + + .DataINEndpointNumber = CDC_TX_EPNUM, + .DataINEndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false, + + .DataOUTEndpointNumber = CDC_RX_EPNUM, + .DataOUTEndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false, + + .NotificationEndpointNumber = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, + .NotificationEndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false, + }, + }; + +/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = 2, + + .DataINEndpointNumber = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, + .DataINEndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false, + + .DataOUTEndpointNumber = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, + .DataOUTEndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false, + + .TotalLUNs = TOTAL_LUNS, + }, + }; + +/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be + * used like any regular character stream in the C APIs + */ +static FILE USBSerialStream; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */ + CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + sei(); + + for (;;) + { + CheckJoystickMovement(); + + /* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */ + CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + Joystick_Init(); + SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER); + Dataflash_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */ + DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(); +} + +/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */ +void CheckJoystickMovement(void) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + char* ReportString = NULL; + static bool ActionSent = false; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n"; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n"; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n"; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n"; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n"; + else + ActionSent = false; + + if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false)) + { + ActionSent = true; + + /* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */ + fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream); + + /* Alternatively, without the stream: */ + // CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString); + } +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface); +} + +/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + return CommandSuccess; +} diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h index 6eaa19b79..7bb11d0c3 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h @@ -1,91 +1,91 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/wdt.h>
- #include <avr/power.h>
- #include <avr/interrupt.h>
- #include <string.h>
-
- #include "Descriptors.h"
-
- #include "Lib/SCSI.h"
- #include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
-
- #include <LUFA/Version.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY LEDS_LED2
-
- /** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
- #define TOTAL_LUNS 1
-
- /** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
- #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
-
- /** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
- #define DISK_READ_ONLY false
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void SetupHardware(void);
- void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
-
- void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for VirtualSerial.c. + */ + +#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_ +#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <string.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include "Lib/SCSI.h" + #include "Lib/DataflashManager.h" + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY LEDS_LED2 + + /** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */ + #define TOTAL_LUNS 1 + + /** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */ + #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS) + + /** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */ + #define DISK_READ_ONLY false + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void CheckJoystickMovement(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt index af13cdd27..ff1d3c26e 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt @@ -1,86 +1,86 @@ -/** \file
- *
- * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mass Storage Demo
- *
- * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
- *
- * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
- *
- * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
- * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
- * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
- *
- * \section Sec_Info USB Information:
- *
- * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- * <td>Device</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
- * Mass Storage Device</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
- * Bulk-Only Transport</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
- * USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
- * USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
- * SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
- * SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- * \section Sec_Description Project Description:
- *
- * Combined Communications Device Class/Mass Storage demonstration application.
- * This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
- * CDC and Mass Storage device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a flash
- * drive. Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings, and data can be
- * written to or read from the exposed flash drive interface in the same manner as
- * other USB flash drives. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the
- * host.
- *
- * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
- * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
- * project's directory as the device's driver when running under
- * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
- * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
- * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
- * CDC-ACM drivers.
- *
- * \section Sec_Options Project Options
- *
- * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
- * <td>MassStorage.h</td>
- * <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -
- * this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- */
-
+/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mass Storage Demo + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n + * Mass Storage Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n + * Bulk-Only Transport</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n + * USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n + * USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n + * SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n + * SCSI Block Commands Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Combined Communications Device Class/Mass Storage demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined + * CDC and Mass Storage device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a flash + * drive. Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings, and data can be + * written to or read from the exposed flash drive interface in the same manner as + * other USB flash drives. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the + * host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td> + * <td><b>Location:</b></td> + * <td><b>Description:</b></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td> + * <td>MassStorage.h</td> + * <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive - + * this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile index 21b1d7fa3..cfef5268f 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile +++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile @@ -1,727 +1,727 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).
-ARCH = AVR8
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by
-# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-# software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_USB = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = VirtualSerialMassStorage
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens
-LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- Descriptors.c \
- Lib/DataflashManager.c \
- Lib/SCSI.c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=c99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \
-debug gdb-config checksource
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation). +ARCH = AVR8 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by +# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value +# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to +# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate +# software delays. +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_USB = $(F_CPU) + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = VirtualSerialMassStorage + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens +LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1 +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + Lib/DataflashManager.c \ + Lib/SCSI.c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=c99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ +debug gdb-config checksource diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c index 08c50c736..039736a28 100644 --- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c +++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c @@ -1,441 +1,441 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#include "TestAndMeasurement.h"
-
-/** Contains the (usually static) capabilities of the TMC device. This table is requested by the
- * host upon enumeration to give it information on what features of the Test and Measurement USB
- * Class the device supports.
- */
-TMC_Capabilities_t Capabilities =
- {
- .Status = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS,
- .TMCVersion = VERSION_BCD(1.00),
-
- .Interface =
- {
- .ListenOnly = false,
- .TalkOnly = false,
- .PulseIndicateSupported = false,
- },
-
- .Device =
- {
- .SupportsAbortINOnMatch = false,
- },
- };
-
-/** Current TMC control request that is being processed */
-static uint8_t RequestInProgress = 0;
-
-/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk IN data */
-static bool IsTMCBulkINReset = false;
-
-/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk OUT data */
-static bool IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
-
-/** Last used tag value for data transfers */
-static uint8_t CurrentTransferTag = 0;
-
-/** Length of last data transfer, for reporting to the host in case an in-progress transfer is aborted */
-static uint32_t LastTransferLength = 0;
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- * setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- SetupHardware();
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- sei();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- TMC_Task();
- USB_USBTask();
- }
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Disable clock division */
- clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
- /* Hardware Initialization */
- LEDs_Init();
- USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
- * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
- * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
- * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
- bool ConfigSuccess = true;
-
- /* Setup TMC In, Out and Notification Endpoints */
- ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,
- TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
- ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,
- TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
- ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT,
- TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- /* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
- * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
- * internally.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
-{
- uint8_t TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS;
-
- /* Process TMC specific control requests */
- switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
- {
- case Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
- {
- /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
- if (RequestInProgress != 0)
- {
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;
- }
- else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
- {
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
- }
- else
- {
- /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data OUT requests should be aborted */
- IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
-
- /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
- RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response byte */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
- {
- /* Check that an ABORT BULK OUT transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
- if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
- else if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
- else
- RequestInProgress = 0;
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response bytes */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
- Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
- Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
- {
- /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
- if (RequestInProgress != 0)
- {
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;
- }
- else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
- {
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
- }
- else
- {
- /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN requests should be aborted */
- IsTMCBulkINReset = true;
-
- /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
- RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response bytes */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
- Endpoint_Write_8(CurrentTransferTag);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
- {
- /* Check that an ABORT BULK IN transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
- if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
- else if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
- else
- RequestInProgress = 0;
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response bytes */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
- Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
- Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_InitiateClear:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
- {
- /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress */
- if (RequestInProgress != 0)
- {
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS);
- }
- else
- {
- /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN and OUT requests should be aborted */
- IsTMCBulkINReset = true;
- IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
-
- /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
- RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateClear;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response byte */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_CheckClearStatus:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
- {
- /* Check that a CLEAR transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
- if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateClear)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
- else if (IsTMCBulkINReset || IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
- TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
- else
- RequestInProgress = 0;
-
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the request response bytes */
- Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
- Endpoint_Write_8(0);
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
- }
-
- break;
- case Req_GetCapabilities:
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
- {
- Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
-
- /* Write the device capabilities to the control endpoint */
- Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&Capabilities, sizeof(TMC_Capabilities_t));
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
- }
-
- break;
- }
-}
-
-/** Function to manage TMC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
-void TMC_Task(void)
-{
- /* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
- if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
- return;
-
- TMC_MessageHeader_t MessageHeader;
- uint16_t BytesTransferred;
-
- /* Try to read in a TMC message from the interface, process if one is available */
- if (ReadTMCHeader(&MessageHeader))
- {
- /* Indicate busy */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
- switch (MessageHeader.MessageID)
- {
- case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT:
- BytesTransferred = 0;
- while (Endpoint_Discard_Stream(MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
- {
- if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
- break;
- }
- LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;
-
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
- break;
- case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN:
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
- char MessageData[] = "TMC Class Test";
-
- MessageHeader.TransferSize = strlen(MessageData);
- MessageHeader.MessageIDSpecific.DeviceOUT.LastMessageTransaction = true;
- WriteTMCHeader(&MessageHeader);
-
- BytesTransferred = 0;
- while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageData, MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
- {
- if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
- break;
- }
- LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- break;
- default:
- Endpoint_StallTransaction();
- break;
- }
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
- }
-
- /* All pending data has been processed - reset the data abort flags */
- IsTMCBulkINReset = false;
- IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
-}
-
-/** Attempts to read in the TMC message header from the TMC interface.
- *
- * \param[out] MessageHeader Pointer to a location where the read header (if any) should be stored
- *
- * \return Boolean true if a header was read, false otherwise
- */
-bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
-{
- uint16_t BytesTransferred;
- uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
- /* Select the Data Out endpoint */
- Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM);
-
- /* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */
- if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
- return false;
-
- /* Read in the header of the command from the host */
- BytesTransferred = 0;
- while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
- {
- if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
- break;
- }
-
- /* Store the new command tag value for later use */
- CurrentTransferTag = MessageHeader->Tag;
-
- /* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
- return (!(IsTMCBulkOUTReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
-}
-
-bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
-{
- uint16_t BytesTransferred;
- uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
- /* Set the message tag of the command header */
- MessageHeader->Tag = CurrentTransferTag;
- MessageHeader->InverseTag = ~CurrentTransferTag;
-
- /* Select the Data In endpoint */
- Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM);
-
- /* Send the command header to the host */
- BytesTransferred = 0;
- while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
- {
- if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
- break;
- }
-
- /* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
- return (!(IsTMCBulkINReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "TestAndMeasurement.h" + +/** Contains the (usually static) capabilities of the TMC device. This table is requested by the + * host upon enumeration to give it information on what features of the Test and Measurement USB + * Class the device supports. + */ +TMC_Capabilities_t Capabilities = + { + .Status = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS, + .TMCVersion = VERSION_BCD(1.00), + + .Interface = + { + .ListenOnly = false, + .TalkOnly = false, + .PulseIndicateSupported = false, + }, + + .Device = + { + .SupportsAbortINOnMatch = false, + }, + }; + +/** Current TMC control request that is being processed */ +static uint8_t RequestInProgress = 0; + +/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk IN data */ +static bool IsTMCBulkINReset = false; + +/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk OUT data */ +static bool IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false; + +/** Last used tag value for data transfers */ +static uint8_t CurrentTransferTag = 0; + +/** Length of last data transfer, for reporting to the host in case an in-progress transfer is aborted */ +static uint32_t LastTransferLength = 0; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + sei(); + + for (;;) + { + TMC_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + /* Setup TMC In, Out and Notification Endpoints */ + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, + TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, + TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, + TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + uint8_t TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS; + + /* Process TMC specific control requests */ + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)) + { + /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */ + if (RequestInProgress != 0) + { + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS; + } + else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag) + { + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS; + } + else + { + /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data OUT requests should be aborted */ + IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true; + + /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */ + RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response byte */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)) + { + /* Check that an ABORT BULK OUT transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */ + if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS; + else if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING; + else + RequestInProgress = 0; + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response bytes */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0); + Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)) + { + /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */ + if (RequestInProgress != 0) + { + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS; + } + else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag) + { + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS; + } + else + { + /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN requests should be aborted */ + IsTMCBulkINReset = true; + + /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */ + RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response bytes */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + Endpoint_Write_8(CurrentTransferTag); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)) + { + /* Check that an ABORT BULK IN transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */ + if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS; + else if (IsTMCBulkINReset) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING; + else + RequestInProgress = 0; + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response bytes */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0); + Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_InitiateClear: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Check that no split transaction is already in progress */ + if (RequestInProgress != 0) + { + Endpoint_Write_8(TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS); + } + else + { + /* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN and OUT requests should be aborted */ + IsTMCBulkINReset = true; + IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true; + + /* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */ + RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateClear; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response byte */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_CheckClearStatus: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Check that a CLEAR transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */ + if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateClear) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS; + else if (IsTMCBulkINReset || IsTMCBulkOUTReset) + TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING; + else + RequestInProgress = 0; + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the request response bytes */ + Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus); + Endpoint_Write_8(0); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(); + } + + break; + case Req_GetCapabilities: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + /* Write the device capabilities to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&Capabilities, sizeof(TMC_Capabilities_t)); + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage TMC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */ +void TMC_Task(void) +{ + /* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */ + if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) + return; + + TMC_MessageHeader_t MessageHeader; + uint16_t BytesTransferred; + + /* Try to read in a TMC message from the interface, process if one is available */ + if (ReadTMCHeader(&MessageHeader)) + { + /* Indicate busy */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + switch (MessageHeader.MessageID) + { + case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT: + BytesTransferred = 0; + while (Endpoint_Discard_Stream(MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) == + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer) + { + if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset) + break; + } + LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred; + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + break; + case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN: + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + char MessageData[] = "TMC Class Test"; + + MessageHeader.TransferSize = strlen(MessageData); + MessageHeader.MessageIDSpecific.DeviceOUT.LastMessageTransaction = true; + WriteTMCHeader(&MessageHeader); + + BytesTransferred = 0; + while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageData, MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) == + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer) + { + if (IsTMCBulkINReset) + break; + } + LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred; + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + break; + default: + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + break; + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + } + + /* All pending data has been processed - reset the data abort flags */ + IsTMCBulkINReset = false; + IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false; +} + +/** Attempts to read in the TMC message header from the TMC interface. + * + * \param[out] MessageHeader Pointer to a location where the read header (if any) should be stored + * + * \return Boolean true if a header was read, false otherwise + */ +bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader) +{ + uint16_t BytesTransferred; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Select the Data Out endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + return false; + + /* Read in the header of the command from the host */ + BytesTransferred = 0; + while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) == + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer) + { + if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset) + break; + } + + /* Store the new command tag value for later use */ + CurrentTransferTag = MessageHeader->Tag; + + /* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */ + return (!(IsTMCBulkOUTReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)); +} + +bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader) +{ + uint16_t BytesTransferred; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Set the message tag of the command header */ + MessageHeader->Tag = CurrentTransferTag; + MessageHeader->InverseTag = ~CurrentTransferTag; + + /* Select the Data In endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Send the command header to the host */ + BytesTransferred = 0; + while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) == + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer) + { + if (IsTMCBulkINReset) + break; + } + + /* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */ + return (!(IsTMCBulkINReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c index cd26538eb..3a1b604ff 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c @@ -1,83 +1,83 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Android Accessory Mode utility functions, for the configuration of an attached
- * Android device into Android Accessory Mode ready for general communication.
- */
-
-#include "AndroidAccessoryCommands.h"
-
-uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)
-{
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol,
- .wValue = 0,
- .wIndex = 0,
- .wLength = sizeof(uint16_t),
- };
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
- return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);
-}
-
-uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
- char* String)
-{
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_SendString,
- .wValue = 0,
- .wIndex = StringIndex,
- .wLength = (strlen(String) + 1),
- };
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
- return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(String);
-}
-
-uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void)
-{
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode,
- .wValue = 0,
- .wIndex = 0,
- .wLength = 0,
- };
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
- return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Android Accessory Mode utility functions, for the configuration of an attached + * Android device into Android Accessory Mode ready for general communication. + */ + +#include "AndroidAccessoryCommands.h" + +uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol); +} + +uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex, + char* String) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_SendString, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = StringIndex, + .wLength = (strlen(String) + 1), + }; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(String); +} + +uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h index d5f6fa842..68fbb47b1 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h @@ -1,74 +1,74 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for AndroidAccessoryCommands.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
-#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <stdint.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Enums: */
- enum Android_Requests_t
- {
- ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol = 51,
- ANDROID_Req_SendString = 52,
- ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode = 53,
- };
-
- enum Android_Strings_t
- {
- ANDROID_STRING_Manufacturer = 0,
- ANDROID_STRING_Model = 1,
- ANDROID_STRING_Description = 2,
- ANDROID_STRING_Version = 3,
- ANDROID_STRING_URI = 4,
- ANDROID_STRING_Serial = 5,
- };
-
- enum Android_Protocols_t
- {
- ANDROID_PROTOCOL_Accessory = 0x0001,
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol);
- uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
- char* String);
- uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AndroidAccessoryCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <stdint.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Enums: */ + enum Android_Requests_t + { + ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol = 51, + ANDROID_Req_SendString = 52, + ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode = 53, + }; + + enum Android_Strings_t + { + ANDROID_STRING_Manufacturer = 0, + ANDROID_STRING_Model = 1, + ANDROID_STRING_Description = 2, + ANDROID_STRING_Version = 3, + ANDROID_STRING_URI = 4, + ANDROID_STRING_Serial = 5, + }; + + enum Android_Protocols_t + { + ANDROID_PROTOCOL_Accessory = 0x0001, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol); + uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex, + char* String); + uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void); + +#endif diff --git a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h index 5d808a307..f6ec104e9 100644 --- a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h +++ b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h @@ -1,122 +1,122 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/*
- This is a header file which can be used to configure LUFA's
- compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
- constants supplied through a makefile. To use this configuration
- header, copy this into your project's root directory and supply
- the USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token to the compiler so that it is
- defined in all compiled source files.
-
- For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
- manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
-*/
-
-#ifndef __LUFA_CONFIG_H__
-#define __LUFA_CONFIG_H__
-
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
-
- /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
-// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
-
- /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
-// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
-
- /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
-// #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-// #define USB_HOST_ONLY
-// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
-// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS
-
- /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
-// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
-// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here}
-// #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here}
-// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATION {Insert Value Here}
-// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
-// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-
- /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here}
-// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here}
-
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
-
- /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
-// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
-
- /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
-// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
-
- /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-// #define USB_HOST_ONLY
-// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS
-
- /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
-// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here}
-// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATION {Insert Value Here}
-// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
-// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
-// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
-
- /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
-// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here}
-// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here}
-
- #endif
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + This is a header file which can be used to configure LUFA's + compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time + constants supplied through a makefile. To use this configuration + header, copy this into your project's root directory and supply + the USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token to the compiler so that it is + defined in all compiled source files. + + For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". +*/ + +#ifndef __LUFA_CONFIG_H__ +#define __LUFA_CONFIG_H__ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG +// #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL +// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here} +// #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATION {Insert Value Here} +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} + + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL +// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here} +// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATION {Insert Value Here} +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} + + #endif +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.avr8 b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.avr8 index 26a3b1445..412c8a985 100644 --- a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.avr8 +++ b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.avr8 @@ -1,713 +1,713 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ###
-
-
-# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation)
-ARCH = AVR8
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ###
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
-# F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-# software delays.
-F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ###
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ###
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token)
-LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ###
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
- ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ###
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \
-debug gdb-config checksource
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ### + + +# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation) +ARCH = AVR8 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ### + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by +# F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value +# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to +# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate +# software delays. +F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ### + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ### + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token) +LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ### + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) + ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ### + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ +debug gdb-config checksource diff --git a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.uc3 b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.uc3 index 645f6c288..0e8f1a3d7 100644 --- a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.uc3 +++ b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.uc3 @@ -1,486 +1,486 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ###
-
-
-# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation)
-ARCH = UC3
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ###
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This should be the frequency the system core runs at, after the system clock
-# has been set up correctly and started.
-F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# USB controller master clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency of the USB controller's clock generator in Hz.
-#
-# For the UC3 chips, this should be equal to 48MHz or 96MHz.
-F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ###
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ###
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token)
-LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ###
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
- ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ###
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Debugging level.
-DEBUG = 3
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -masm-addr-pseudos
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -masm-addr-pseudos
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections --rodata-writable
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--direct-data
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr32-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr32-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr32-objdump
-SIZE = avr32-size
-AR = avr32-ar rcs
-NM = avr32-nm
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex lss sym doxygen clean clean_list clean_doxygen \
-dfu flip checksource
-
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ### + + +# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation) +ARCH = UC3 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ### + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This should be the frequency the system core runs at, after the system clock +# has been set up correctly and started. +F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# USB controller master clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency of the USB controller's clock generator in Hz. +# +# For the UC3 chips, this should be equal to 48MHz or 96MHz. +F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ### + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ### + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token) +LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ### + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) + ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ### + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Debugging level. +DEBUG = 3 + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -masm-addr-pseudos +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -masm-addr-pseudos +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections --rodata-writable +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--direct-data +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr32-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr32-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr32-objdump +SIZE = avr32-size +AR = avr32-ar rcs +NM = avr32-nm +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mpart=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@ + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex lss sym doxygen clean clean_list clean_doxygen \ +dfu flip checksource + diff --git a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.xmega b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.xmega index 719a107fd..77c99d380 100644 --- a/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.xmega +++ b/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template.xmega @@ -1,705 +1,705 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ###
-
-
-# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation)
-ARCH = XMEGA
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ###
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This should be the frequency the system core runs at, after the system clock
-# has been set up correctly and started.
-F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# USB controller master clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency of the USB controller's clock generator in Hz.
-#
-# For the XMEGA chips, this should be equal to a multiple of 6MHz for Low
-# Speed USB mode, or a multiple of 48MHz for Full Speed USB mode.
-F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ###
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ###
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ###
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token)
-LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ###
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
- ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ###
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \
-debug gdb-config checksource
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = ### INSERT NAME OF MICROCONTROLLER MODEL HERE ### + + +# Targeted chip architecture (see library "Architectures" documentation) +ARCH = XMEGA + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = ### INSERT NAME OF BOARD HERE, OR NONE IF NO BOARD DRIVERS USED ### + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This should be the frequency the system core runs at, after the system clock +# has been set up correctly and started. +F_CPU = ### INSERT PRESCALED SYSTEM CLOCK SPEED HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# USB controller master clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency of the USB controller's clock generator in Hz. +# +# For the XMEGA chips, this should be equal to a multiple of 6MHz for Low +# Speed USB mode, or a multiple of 48MHz for Full Speed USB mode. +F_USB = ### INSERT CLOCK TO USB MODULE HERE, IN HZ ### + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = ### INSERT NAME OF MAIN FILENAME HERE, WITHOUT EXTENSION ### + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ### INSERT PATH TO LUFA LIBRARY RELATIVE TO PROJECT DIRECTORY HERE ### + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens (add '-D' before each token) +LUFA_OPTS = ### INSERT LUFA COMPILE TIME TOKES HERE ### + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) + ### INSERT ADDITIONAL PROJECT SOURCE FILENAMES OR LUFA MODULE NAMES HERE ### + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CPPFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ +debug gdb-config checksource diff --git a/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h b/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h index 8dab72ae0..dad3ba7d7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h +++ b/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h @@ -1,84 +1,84 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Supported library architecture defines.
- *
- * \copydetails Group_Architectures
- *
- * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
- * functionality.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Common
- * \defgroup Group_Architectures Hardware Architectures
- * \brief Supported library architecture defines.
- *
- * Architecture macros for selecting the desired target microcontroller architecture. One of these values should be
- * defined as the value of \c ARCH in the user project makefile via the \c -D compiler switch to GCC, to select the
- * target architecture.
- *
- * The selected architecture should remain consistent with the makefile \c ARCH value, which is used to select the
- * underlying driver source files for each architecture.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__
-#define __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Selects the Atmel 8-bit AVR (AT90USB* and ATMEGA*U* chips) architecture. */
- #define ARCH_AVR8 0
-
- /** Selects the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR (AT32UC3* chips) architecture. */
- #define ARCH_UC3 1
-
- /** Selects the Atmel XMEGA AVR (ATXMEGA*U chips) architecture. */
- #define ARCH_XMEGA 2
-
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- #define ARCH_ ARCH_AVR8
-
- #if !defined(ARCH)
- #define ARCH ARCH_AVR8
- #endif
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Supported library architecture defines. + * + * \copydetails Group_Architectures + * + * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's + * functionality. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Common + * \defgroup Group_Architectures Hardware Architectures + * \brief Supported library architecture defines. + * + * Architecture macros for selecting the desired target microcontroller architecture. One of these values should be + * defined as the value of \c ARCH in the user project makefile via the \c -D compiler switch to GCC, to select the + * target architecture. + * + * The selected architecture should remain consistent with the makefile \c ARCH value, which is used to select the + * underlying driver source files for each architecture. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__ +#define __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__ + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Selects the Atmel 8-bit AVR (AT90USB* and ATMEGA*U* chips) architecture. */ + #define ARCH_AVR8 0 + + /** Selects the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR (AT32UC3* chips) architecture. */ + #define ARCH_UC3 1 + + /** Selects the Atmel XMEGA AVR (ATXMEGA*U chips) architecture. */ + #define ARCH_XMEGA 2 + + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define ARCH_ ARCH_AVR8 + + #if !defined(ARCH) + #define ARCH ARCH_AVR8 + #endif + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h b/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h index 9dcd7637c..6b4826aa5 100644 --- a/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h +++ b/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h @@ -1,98 +1,98 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Compiler specific macros for code optimization and correctness.
- *
- * \copydetails Group_CompilerSpecific
- *
- * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
- * functionality.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Common
- * \defgroup Group_CompilerSpecific Compiler Specific Macros
- * \brief Compiler specific macros for code optimization and correctness.
- *
- * Compiler specific macros to expose certain compiler features which may increase the level of code optimization
- * for a specific compiler, or correct certain issues that may be present such as memory barriers for use in conjunction
- * with atomic variable access.
- *
- * Where possible, on alternative compilers, these macros will either have no effect, or default to returning a sane value
- * so that they can be used in existing code without the need for extra compiler checks in the user application code.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__
-#define __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- #if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Forces GCC to use pointer indirection (via the device's pointer register pairs) when accessing the given
- * struct pointer. In some cases GCC will emit non-optimal assembly code when accessing a structure through
- * a pointer, resulting in a larger binary. When this macro is used on a (non \c const) structure pointer before
- * use, it will force GCC to use pointer indirection on the elements rather than direct store and load
- * instructions.
- *
- * \param[in, out] StructPtr Pointer to a structure which is to be forced into indirect access mode.
- */
- #define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr) __asm__ __volatile__("" : "=b" (StructPtr) : "0" (StructPtr))
-
- /** Forces GCC to create a memory barrier, ensuring that memory accesses are not reordered past the barrier point.
- * This can be used before ordering-critical operations, to ensure that the compiler does not re-order the resulting
- * assembly output in an unexpected manner on sections of code that are ordering-specific.
- */
- #define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER() __asm__ __volatile__("" ::: "memory");
-
- /** Evaluates to boolean true if the specified value can be determined at compile time to be a constant value
- * when compiling under GCC.
- *
- * \param[in] x Value to check compile time constantness of.
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the given value is known to be a compile time constant.
- */
- #define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x) __builtin_constant_p(x)
- #else
- #define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr)
- #define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER()
- #define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x) 0
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Compiler specific macros for code optimization and correctness. + * + * \copydetails Group_CompilerSpecific + * + * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's + * functionality. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Common + * \defgroup Group_CompilerSpecific Compiler Specific Macros + * \brief Compiler specific macros for code optimization and correctness. + * + * Compiler specific macros to expose certain compiler features which may increase the level of code optimization + * for a specific compiler, or correct certain issues that may be present such as memory barriers for use in conjunction + * with atomic variable access. + * + * Where possible, on alternative compilers, these macros will either have no effect, or default to returning a sane value + * so that they can be used in existing code without the need for extra compiler checks in the user application code. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__ +#define __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__ + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Forces GCC to use pointer indirection (via the device's pointer register pairs) when accessing the given + * struct pointer. In some cases GCC will emit non-optimal assembly code when accessing a structure through + * a pointer, resulting in a larger binary. When this macro is used on a (non \c const) structure pointer before + * use, it will force GCC to use pointer indirection on the elements rather than direct store and load + * instructions. + * + * \param[in, out] StructPtr Pointer to a structure which is to be forced into indirect access mode. + */ + #define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr) __asm__ __volatile__("" : "=b" (StructPtr) : "0" (StructPtr)) + + /** Forces GCC to create a memory barrier, ensuring that memory accesses are not reordered past the barrier point. + * This can be used before ordering-critical operations, to ensure that the compiler does not re-order the resulting + * assembly output in an unexpected manner on sections of code that are ordering-specific. + */ + #define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER() __asm__ __volatile__("" ::: "memory"); + + /** Evaluates to boolean true if the specified value can be determined at compile time to be a constant value + * when compiling under GCC. + * + * \param[in] x Value to check compile time constantness of. + * + * \return Boolean true if the given value is known to be a compile time constant. + */ + #define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x) __builtin_constant_p(x) + #else + #define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr) + #define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER() + #define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x) 0 + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h b/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h index 58f8012c1..123ad425f 100644 --- a/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h +++ b/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h @@ -1,476 +1,476 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Endianness and Byte Ordering macros and functions.
- *
- * \copydetails Group_Endianness
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Endianness
- * \defgroup Group_ByteSwapping Byte Reordering
- * \brief Macros and functions for forced byte reordering.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Endianness
- * \defgroup Group_EndianConversion Endianness Conversion
- * \brief Macros and functions for automatic endianness conversion.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Common
- * \defgroup Group_Endianness Endianness and Byte Ordering
- * \brief Convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering
- *
- * Common library convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__
-#define __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
- #endif
-
- #if !(defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) || defined(ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN))
- #error ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN or ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN not set for the specified architecture.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Swaps the byte ordering of a 16-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings
- * of dynamic values computed at runtime, use \ref SwapEndian_16() instead. The result of this macro can be used
- * inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the
- * inline function variant.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
- *
- * \param[in] x 16-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.
- *
- * \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.
- */
- #define SWAPENDIAN_16(x) (uint16_t)((((x) & 0xFF00) >> 8) | (((x) & 0x00FF) << 8))
-
- /** Swaps the byte ordering of a 32-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings
- * of dynamic values computed at runtime- use \ref SwapEndian_32() instead. The result of this macro can be used
- * inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the
- * inline function variant.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
- *
- * \param[in] x 32-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.
- *
- * \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.
- */
- #define SWAPENDIAN_32(x) (uint32_t)((((x) & 0xFF000000UL) >> 24UL) | (((x) & 0x00FF0000UL) >> 8UL) | \
- (((x) & 0x0000FF00UL) << 8UL) | (((x) & 0x000000FFUL) << 24UL))
-
- #if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) && !defined(le16_to_cpu)
- #define le16_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_16(x)
- #define le32_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_32(x)
- #define be16_to_cpu(x) x
- #define be32_to_cpu(x) x
- #define cpu_to_le16(x) SwapEndian_16(x)
- #define cpu_to_le32(x) SwapEndian_32(x)
- #define cpu_to_be16(x) x
- #define cpu_to_be32(x) x
- #define LE16_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
- #define LE32_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
- #define BE16_TO_CPU(x) x
- #define BE32_TO_CPU(x) x
- #define CPU_TO_LE16(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
- #define CPU_TO_LE32(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
- #define CPU_TO_BE16(x) x
- #define CPU_TO_BE32(x) x
- #elif !defined(le16_to_cpu)
- /** \name Run-time endianness conversion */
- //@{
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref LE16_TO_CPU instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define le16_to_cpu(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref LE32_TO_CPU instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define le32_to_cpu(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref BE16_TO_CPU instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define be16_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_16(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref BE32_TO_CPU instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define be32_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_32(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE16 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define cpu_to_le16(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE32 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define cpu_to_le32(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE16 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define cpu_to_be16(x) SwapEndian_16(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE32 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define cpu_to_be32(x) SwapEndian_32(x)
-
- //@}
-
- /** \name Compile-time endianness conversion */
- //@{
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref le16_to_cpu instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define LE16_TO_CPU(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref le32_to_cpu instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define LE32_TO_CPU(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref be16_to_cpu instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define BE16_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
- * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref be32_to_cpu instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define BE32_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le16 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define CPU_TO_LE16(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le32 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define CPU_TO_LE32(x) x
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be16 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define CPU_TO_BE16(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
-
- /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
- * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
- *
- * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
- *
- * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
- * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be32 instead.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
- *
- * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
- *
- * \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
- */
- #define CPU_TO_BE32(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
-
- //! @}
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit value.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
- *
- * \param[in] Word Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.
- */
- static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
- static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word)
- {
- uint8_t Temp;
-
- union
- {
- uint16_t Word;
- uint8_t Bytes[2];
- } Data;
-
- Data.Word = Word;
-
- Temp = Data.Bytes[0];
- Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[1];
- Data.Bytes[1] = Temp;
-
- return Data.Word;
- }
-
- /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit value.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
- *
- * \param[in] DWord Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.
- */
- static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
- static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord)
- {
- uint8_t Temp;
-
- union
- {
- uint32_t DWord;
- uint8_t Bytes[4];
- } Data;
-
- Data.DWord = DWord;
-
- Temp = Data.Bytes[0];
- Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[3];
- Data.Bytes[3] = Temp;
-
- Temp = Data.Bytes[1];
- Data.Bytes[1] = Data.Bytes[2];
- Data.Bytes[2] = Temp;
-
- return Data.DWord;
- }
-
- /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte value.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
- *
- * \param[in,out] Data Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed.
- * \param[in] Length Length of the data in bytes.
- */
- static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,
- uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,
- uint8_t Length)
- {
- uint8_t* CurrDataPos = (uint8_t*)Data;
-
- while (Length > 1)
- {
- uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos;
- *CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1);
- *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1) = Temp;
-
- CurrDataPos++;
- Length -= 2;
- }
- }
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Endianness and Byte Ordering macros and functions. + * + * \copydetails Group_Endianness + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Endianness + * \defgroup Group_ByteSwapping Byte Reordering + * \brief Macros and functions for forced byte reordering. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Endianness + * \defgroup Group_EndianConversion Endianness Conversion + * \brief Macros and functions for automatic endianness conversion. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Common + * \defgroup Group_Endianness Endianness and Byte Ordering + * \brief Convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering + * + * Common library convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__ +#define __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__ + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality. + #endif + + #if !(defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) || defined(ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN)) + #error ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN or ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN not set for the specified architecture. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Swaps the byte ordering of a 16-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings + * of dynamic values computed at runtime, use \ref SwapEndian_16() instead. The result of this macro can be used + * inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the + * inline function variant. + * + * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping + * + * \param[in] x 16-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped. + * + * \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed. + */ + #define SWAPENDIAN_16(x) (uint16_t)((((x) & 0xFF00) >> 8) | (((x) & 0x00FF) << 8)) + + /** Swaps the byte ordering of a 32-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings + * of dynamic values computed at runtime- use \ref SwapEndian_32() instead. The result of this macro can be used + * inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the + * inline function variant. + * + * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping + * + * \param[in] x 32-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped. + * + * \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed. + */ + #define SWAPENDIAN_32(x) (uint32_t)((((x) & 0xFF000000UL) >> 24UL) | (((x) & 0x00FF0000UL) >> 8UL) | \ + (((x) & 0x0000FF00UL) << 8UL) | (((x) & 0x000000FFUL) << 24UL)) + + #if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) && !defined(le16_to_cpu) + #define le16_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_16(x) + #define le32_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_32(x) + #define be16_to_cpu(x) x + #define be32_to_cpu(x) x + #define cpu_to_le16(x) SwapEndian_16(x) + #define cpu_to_le32(x) SwapEndian_32(x) + #define cpu_to_be16(x) x + #define cpu_to_be32(x) x + #define LE16_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x) + #define LE32_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x) + #define BE16_TO_CPU(x) x + #define BE32_TO_CPU(x) x + #define CPU_TO_LE16(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x) + #define CPU_TO_LE32(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x) + #define CPU_TO_BE16(x) x + #define CPU_TO_BE32(x) x + #elif !defined(le16_to_cpu) + /** \name Run-time endianness conversion */ + //@{ + + /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref LE16_TO_CPU instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define le16_to_cpu(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref LE32_TO_CPU instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define le32_to_cpu(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref BE16_TO_CPU instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define be16_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_16(x) + + /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref BE32_TO_CPU instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define be32_to_cpu(x) SwapEndian_32(x) + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE16 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define cpu_to_le16(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE32 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define cpu_to_le32(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE16 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define cpu_to_be16(x) SwapEndian_16(x) + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE32 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define cpu_to_be32(x) SwapEndian_32(x) + + //@} + + /** \name Compile-time endianness conversion */ + //@{ + + /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness + * conversion, use \ref le16_to_cpu instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define LE16_TO_CPU(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness + * conversion, use \ref le32_to_cpu instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define LE32_TO_CPU(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref be16_to_cpu instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define BE16_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x) + + /** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the + * Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref be32_to_cpu instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define BE32_TO_CPU(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x) + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le16 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define CPU_TO_LE16(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le32 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define CPU_TO_LE32(x) x + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be16 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define CPU_TO_BE16(x) SWAPENDIAN_16(x) + + /** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it + * is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture. + * + * On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing. + * + * \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness + * conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be32 instead. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndianConversion + * + * \param[in] x Data to perform the endianness conversion on. + * + * \return Endian corrected version of the input value. + */ + #define CPU_TO_BE32(x) SWAPENDIAN_32(x) + + //! @} + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit value. + * + * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping + * + * \param[in] Word Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped. + */ + static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST; + static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word) + { + uint8_t Temp; + + union + { + uint16_t Word; + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + } Data; + + Data.Word = Word; + + Temp = Data.Bytes[0]; + Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[1]; + Data.Bytes[1] = Temp; + + return Data.Word; + } + + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit value. + * + * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping + * + * \param[in] DWord Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped. + */ + static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST; + static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord) + { + uint8_t Temp; + + union + { + uint32_t DWord; + uint8_t Bytes[4]; + } Data; + + Data.DWord = DWord; + + Temp = Data.Bytes[0]; + Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[3]; + Data.Bytes[3] = Temp; + + Temp = Data.Bytes[1]; + Data.Bytes[1] = Data.Bytes[2]; + Data.Bytes[2] = Temp; + + return Data.DWord; + } + + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte value. + * + * \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping + * + * \param[in,out] Data Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed. + * \param[in] Length Length of the data in bytes. + */ + static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data, + uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data, + uint8_t Length) + { + uint8_t* CurrDataPos = (uint8_t*)Data; + + while (Length > 1) + { + uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos; + *CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1); + *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1) = Temp; + + CurrDataPos++; + Length -= 2; + } + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h index 125481d0e..97f20053e 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h @@ -1,124 +1,124 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4 ADAFRUITU4
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board (http://ladyada.net/products/atmega32u4breakout).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__
-#define __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRE |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTE |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTE &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTE &= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4 ADAFRUITU4 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board (http://ladyada.net/products/atmega32u4breakout). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__ +#define __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRE |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTE |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTE &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTE &= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h index 42e2788c8..dfb77fa38 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h @@ -1,126 +1,126 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT BLACKCAT
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG (http://www.embeddedcomputers.net/products/BlackcatUSB/.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__
-#define __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 3)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
- /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT BLACKCAT + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG (http://www.embeddedcomputers.net/products/BlackcatUSB/. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__ +#define __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 3) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h index a19bfe5bf..9030326e1 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h @@ -1,126 +1,126 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS MAXIMUS
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus (http://www.avrusb.com/).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__
-#define __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 7)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS MAXIMUS + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus (http://www.avrusb.com/). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__ +#define __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 7) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h index 46746f817..e3ba95786 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h @@ -1,92 +1,92 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 7)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- DDRD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- PORTD |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162 + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 7) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + DDRD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + PORTD |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + } + + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h index 443316be5..6e8472922 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h @@ -1,124 +1,124 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__
-#define __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__ +#define __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h index 3ea294fd8..0d645c514 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h @@ -1,91 +1,91 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_MINIMUS
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_MINIMUS MINIMUS
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 7)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- DDRD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- PORTD |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_MINIMUS + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_MINIMUS MINIMUS + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 7) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + DDRD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + PORTD |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + } + + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h index 3dfcb3510..a7325482a 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h @@ -1,126 +1,126 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MINIMUS
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MINIMUS MINIMUS
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Minimus USB (http://www.minimususb.com/).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__
-#define __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 5)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 6)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 1
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTD ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_MINIMUS + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_MINIMUS MINIMUS + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Minimus USB (http://www.minimususb.com/). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__ +#define __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 5) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 1 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h index d4436d35b..278bee5c7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h @@ -1,124 +1,124 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2 SPARKFUN8U2
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board (http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
-#define __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTB ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2 SPARKFUN8U2 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board (http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__ +#define __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTB ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h index d4bc5848a..191caa9d2 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h @@ -1,92 +1,92 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_TUL
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_TUL TUL
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_TUL_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_TUL_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 2)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- DDRE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- PORTE |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_TUL + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_TUL TUL + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_TUL_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_TUL_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Button mask for the first button on the board. */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1 << 2) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + DDRE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + PORTE |= BUTTONS_BUTTON1; + } + + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h index 02b7970ce..4968a1888 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h @@ -1,124 +1,124 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_TUL
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_TUL TUL
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_TUL_H__
-#define __LEDS_TUL_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 0)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- DDRF |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTF |= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTF &= ~LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
- const uint8_t ActiveMask)
- {
- PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
- {
- PORTF ^= LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (PORTF & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_TUL + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_TUL TUL + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL). + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_TUL_H__ +#define __LEDS_TUL_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 0) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRF |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTF |= LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTF &= ~LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, + const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTF ^= LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTF & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h index 3f7b04d82..2f05f2c10 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h @@ -1,103 +1,103 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1100
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1100 EVK1100
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define BUTTONS_PORT 2
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Mask of the first button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 24)
-
- /** Mask of the second button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON2 (1UL << 21)
-
- /** Mask of the third button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON3 (1UL << 18)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1100 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1100 EVK1100 + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define BUTTONS_PORT 2 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask of the first button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 24) + + /** Mask of the second button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON2 (1UL << 21) + + /** Mask of the third button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON3 (1UL << 18) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + } + + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h index 58108d47a..e35d1b336 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h @@ -1,110 +1,110 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- * \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1100
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- * \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1100 EVK1100
- * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define JOY_PORT 0
- #define JOY_MASK ((1UL << 28) | (1UL << 27) | (1UL << 26) | (1UL << 25) | (1UL << 20))
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
- #define JOY_LEFT (1UL << 25)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
- #define JOY_UP (1UL << 26)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
- #define JOY_RIGHT (1UL << 28)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
- #define JOY_DOWN (1UL << 27)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
- #define JOY_PRESS (1UL << 20)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;
- };
-
- static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return (uint32_t)(~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].pvr & JOY_MASK));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1100 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Joystick + * \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1100 EVK1100 + * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define JOY_PORT 0 + #define JOY_MASK ((1UL << 28) | (1UL << 27) | (1UL << 26) | (1UL << 25) | (1UL << 20)) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT (1UL << 25) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP (1UL << 26) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT (1UL << 28) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN (1UL << 27) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS (1UL << 20) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK; + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK; + }; + + static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + return (uint32_t)(~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].pvr & JOY_MASK)); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h index aac407a28..484cedeaf 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h @@ -1,153 +1,153 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1100
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1100 EVK1100
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1100_H__
-#define __LEDS_EVK1100_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define LEDS_PORT 1
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 19)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 20)
-
- /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 21)
-
- /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 22)
-
- /** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED5 (1UL << 27)
-
- /** LED mask for the sixth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED6 (1UL << 28)
-
- /** LED mask for the seventh LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED7 (1UL << 29)
-
- /** LED mask for the eighth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED8 (1UL << 30)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 \
- LEDS_LED5 | LEDS_LED6 | LEDS_LED7 | LEDS_LED8)
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = ActiveMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1100 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1100 EVK1100 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1100_H__ +#define __LEDS_EVK1100_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define LEDS_PORT 1 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 19) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 20) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 21) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 22) + + /** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED5 (1UL << 27) + + /** LED mask for the sixth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED6 (1UL << 28) + + /** LED mask for the seventh LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED7 (1UL << 29) + + /** LED mask for the eighth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED8 (1UL << 30) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 \ + LEDS_LED5 | LEDS_LED6 | LEDS_LED7 | LEDS_LED8) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = ActiveMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt = LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h index 928d8e684..f6770a221 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h @@ -1,100 +1,100 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1101
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1101 EVK1101
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define BUTTONS_PORT 1
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Mask of the first button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 2)
-
- /** Mask of the second button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON2 (1UL << 3)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1101 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1101 EVK1101 + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define BUTTONS_PORT 1 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask of the first button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 2) + + /** Mask of the second button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON2 (1UL << 3) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + } + + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h index 5085b49e5..892474db7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h @@ -1,116 +1,116 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- * \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1101
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
- * \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1101 EVK1101
- * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__
-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define JOY_MOVE_PORT 1
- #define JOY_MOVE_MASK ((1UL << 6) | (1UL << 7) | (1UL << 8) | (1UL << 9))
- #define JOY_PRESS_PORT 0
- #define JOY_PRESS_MASK (1UL << 13)
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
- #define JOY_LEFT (1UL << 6)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
- #define JOY_UP (1UL << 7)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
- #define JOY_RIGHT (1UL << 9)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
- #define JOY_DOWN (1UL << 8)
-
- /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
- #define JOY_PRESS (1UL << 13)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gpers = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gpers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
-
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puers = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
- };
-
- static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return (uint32_t)(~((AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & JOY_MOVE_MASK) |
- (AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].pvr & JOY_PRESS_MASK)));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1101 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Joystick + * \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1101 EVK1101 + * \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define JOY_MOVE_PORT 1 + #define JOY_MOVE_MASK ((1UL << 6) | (1UL << 7) | (1UL << 8) | (1UL << 9)) + #define JOY_PRESS_PORT 0 + #define JOY_PRESS_MASK (1UL << 13) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT (1UL << 6) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP (1UL << 7) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT (1UL << 9) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN (1UL << 8) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS (1UL << 13) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gpers = JOY_MOVE_MASK; + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gpers = JOY_PRESS_MASK; + + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puers = JOY_MOVE_MASK; + AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puers = JOY_PRESS_MASK; + }; + + static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + return (uint32_t)(~((AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & JOY_MOVE_MASK) | + (AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].pvr & JOY_PRESS_MASK))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h index 44720da86..08b19fba4 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h @@ -1,140 +1,140 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1101
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1101 EVK1101
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1101_H__
-#define __LEDS_EVK1101_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define LEDS_PORT 0
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 7)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 8)
-
- /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 21)
-
- /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 22)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = ActiveMask;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt = LEDMask;
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1101 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1101 EVK1101 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1101_H__ +#define __LEDS_EVK1101_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define LEDS_PORT 0 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 7) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 8) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 21) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 22) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = LEDMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs = LEDMask; + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc = ActiveMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt = LEDMask; + } + + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h index 35f2bfadf..0b30c2315 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h @@ -1,97 +1,97 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1104
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
- * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1104 EVK1104
- * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- *
- * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__
-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define BUTTONS_PORT 1
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Mask of the first button on the board */
- #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 10)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1104 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Buttons + * \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1104 EVK1104 + * \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * + * Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__ +#define __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define BUTTONS_PORT 1 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask of the first button on the board */ + #define BUTTONS_BUTTON1 (1UL << 10) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Buttons_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2); + } + + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) + { + return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h index 963bd1b9c..6e26cc893 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h @@ -1,154 +1,154 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
- and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
- granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
- copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1104
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
- * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1104 EVK1104
- * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- *
- * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1104_H__
-#define __LEDS_EVK1104_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define LEDS_LEDMASK2 (1UL << 3)
- #define LEDS_LEDMASK3 ((1UL << 9) | (1UL << 6) | (1UL << 5))
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 3)
-
- /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 5)
-
- /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 9)
-
- /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
- #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 6)
-
- /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
- #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
- #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
-
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
-
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
-
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- }
-
- static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
- {
- AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrt = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
- AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrt = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
- }
-
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
- {
- return ((~AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK2) | (~AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK3));
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1104 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_LEDs + * \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1104 EVK1104 + * \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1104_H__ +#define __LEDS_EVK1104_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define LEDS_LEDMASK2 (1UL << 3) + #define LEDS_LEDMASK3 ((1UL << 9) | (1UL << 6) | (1UL << 5)) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1UL << 3) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1UL << 5) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1UL << 9) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1UL << 6) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK2; + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK2; + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK2; + + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK3; + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK3; + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK3; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK2; + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = LEDS_LEDMASK3; + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask) + { + AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrt = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2); + AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrt = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3); + } + + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return ((~AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK2) | (~AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK3)); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h index 725738bcf..e06cdc4b7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h @@ -1,99 +1,99 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.
- * \copydetails Group_AT45DB321C
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_AT45DB321C Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash Commands
- * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.
- *
- * Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash IC.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__
-#define __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name Dataflash Status Values */
- //@{
- #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7)
- #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6)
- #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1)
- //@}
-
- #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F
-
- /** \name Dataflash Commands */
- //@{
- #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7
-
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61
- #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58
- #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59
-
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2
- #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0xE8
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD4
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD6
-
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85
-
- #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81
- #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50
-
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0xCF
-
- #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F
- //@}
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash. + * \copydetails Group_AT45DB321C + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers + * \defgroup Group_AT45DB321C Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash Commands + * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash. + * + * Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash IC. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__ +#define __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name Dataflash Status Values */ + //@{ + #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7) + #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6) + #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1) + //@} + + #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F + + /** \name Dataflash Commands */ + //@{ + #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2 + #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0xE8 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD4 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD6 + + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85 + + #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81 + #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50 + + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF}) + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0xCF + + #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F + //@} + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h index 98041167e..0cbf3da8f 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h @@ -1,109 +1,109 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.
- * \copydetails Group_AT45DB642D
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_AT45DB642D Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash Commands
- * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.
- *
- * Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash IC.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__
-#define __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name Dataflash Status Values */
- //@{
- #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7)
- #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6)
- #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1)
- #define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON (1 << 0)
- //@}
-
- #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F
-
- /** \name Dataflash Commands */
- //@{
- #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7
- #define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN 0xB9
- #define DF_CMD_WAKEUP 0xAB
-
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61
- #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58
- #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59
-
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2
- #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0x03
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD1
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD3
-
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88
- #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82
- #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85
-
- #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81
- #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE 0x7C
-
- #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
- #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1 0xC7
- #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2 0x94
- #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3 0x80
- #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4 0x9A
-
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F
- #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0x9A
-
- #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F
- //@}
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash. + * \copydetails Group_AT45DB642D + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers + * \defgroup Group_AT45DB642D Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash Commands + * \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash. + * + * Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash IC. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__ +#define __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name Dataflash Status Values */ + //@{ + #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7) + #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6) + #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1) + #define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON (1 << 0) + //@} + + #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F + + /** \name Dataflash Commands */ + //@{ + #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7 + #define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN 0xB9 + #define DF_CMD_WAKEUP 0xAB + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2 + #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0x03 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD1 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD3 + + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85 + + #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81 + #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50 + #define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE 0x7C + + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1 0xC7 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2 0x94 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3 0x80 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F + //@} + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h index 64587e64c..3c5552143 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h @@ -1,303 +1,303 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Lightweight ring (circular) buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.
- *
- * Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of
- * different sizes to suit different needs.
- *
- * Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via
- * a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions
- * or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of
- * operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_RingBuff Generic Byte Ring Buffer - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
- * \brief Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.
- *
- * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- * - None
- *
- * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description
- * Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of
- * different sizes to suit different needs.
- *
- * Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via
- * a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions
- * or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of
- * operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.
- *
- * \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage
- * The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
- * application.
- *
- * \code
- * // Create the buffer structure and its underlying storage array
- * RingBuffer_t Buffer;
- * uint8_t BufferData[128];
- *
- * // Initialize the buffer with the created storage array
- * RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&Buffer, BufferData, sizeof(BufferData));
- *
- * // Insert some data into the buffer
- * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'H');
- * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'E');
- * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L');
- * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L');
- * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'O');
- *
- * // Cache the number of stored bytes in the buffer
- * uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&Buffer);
- *
- * // Printer stored data length
- * printf("Buffer Length: %d, Buffer Data: \r\n", BufferCount);
- *
- * // Print contents of the buffer one character at a time
- * while (BufferCount--)
- * putc(RingBuffer_Remove(&Buffer));
- * \endcode
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __RING_BUFFER_H__
-#define __RING_BUFFER_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- /** \brief Ring Buffer Management Structure.
- *
- * Type define for a new ring buffer object. Buffers should be initialized via a call to
- * \ref RingBuffer_InitBuffer() before use.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t* In; /**< Current storage location in the circular buffer. */
- uint8_t* Out; /**< Current retrieval location in the circular buffer. */
- uint8_t* Start; /**< Pointer to the start of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
- uint8_t* End; /**< Pointer to the end of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
- uint8_t Size; /**< Size of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
- uint16_t Count; /**< Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer. */
- } RingBuffer_t;
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Initializes a ring buffer ready for use. Buffers must be initialized via this function
- * before any operations are called upon them. Already initialized buffers may be reset
- * by re-initializing them using this function.
- *
- * \param[out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to initialize.
- * \param[out] DataPtr Pointer to a global array that will hold the data stored into the ring buffer.
- * \param[out] Size Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in the underlying data array.
- */
- static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size)
- ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
- static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size)
- {
- GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- Buffer->In = DataPtr;
- Buffer->Out = DataPtr;
- Buffer->Start = &DataPtr[0];
- Buffer->End = &DataPtr[Size];
- Buffer->Size = Size;
- Buffer->Count = 0;
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the current number of bytes stored in a particular buffer. This value is computed
- * by entering an atomic lock on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the
- * computation takes place. This value should be cached when reading out the contents of the buffer,
- * so that as small a time as possible is spent in an atomic lock.
- *
- * \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the minimum number of bytes
- * stored in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus
- * the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive reads may safely
- * be performed on the buffer.
- *
- * \param[in] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose count is to be computed.
- *
- * \return Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
- {
- uint16_t Count;
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- Count = Buffer->Count;
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
- return Count;
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the free space in a particular buffer. This value is computed by entering an atomic lock
- * on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the computation takes place.
- *
- * \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the maximum number of bytes
- * free in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus
- * the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive writes may safely
- * be performed on the buffer when there is a single writer thread.
- *
- * \param[in] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose free count is to be computed.
- *
- * \return Number of free bytes in the buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
- {
- return (Buffer->Size - RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer));
- }
-
- /** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any data. This should
- * be tested before removing data from the buffer, to ensure that the buffer does not
- * underflow.
- *
- * If the data is to be removed in a loop, store the total number of bytes stored in the
- * buffer (via a call to the \ref RingBuffer_GetCount() function) in a temporary variable
- * to reduce the time spent in atomicity locks.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
- {
- return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == 0);
- }
-
- /** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any free space. This should
- * be tested before storing data to the buffer, to ensure that no data is lost due to a
- * buffer overrun.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
- {
- return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == Buffer->Size);
- }
-
- /** Inserts an element into the ring buffer.
- *
- * \note Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may insert into a single buffer
- * otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution
- * threads.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
- * \param[in] Data Data element to insert into the buffer.
- */
- static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data)
- {
- GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
-
- *Buffer->In = Data;
-
- if (++Buffer->In == Buffer->End)
- Buffer->In = Buffer->Start;
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- Buffer->Count++;
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
- }
-
- /** Removes an element from the ring buffer.
- *
- * \note Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may remove from a single buffer
- * otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution
- * threads.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.
- *
- * \return Next data element stored in the buffer.
- */
- static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer)
- {
- GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
-
- uint8_t Data = *Buffer->Out;
-
- if (++Buffer->Out == Buffer->End)
- Buffer->Out = Buffer->Start;
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- Buffer->Count--;
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
-
- return Data;
- }
-
- /** Returns the next element stored in the ring buffer, without removing it.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.
- *
- * \return Next data element stored in the buffer.
- */
- static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
- {
- return *Buffer->Out;
- }
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Lightweight ring (circular) buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes. + * + * Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of + * different sizes to suit different needs. + * + * Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via + * a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions + * or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of + * operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers + * \defgroup Group_RingBuff Generic Byte Ring Buffer - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h + * \brief Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes. + * + * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies + * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module: + * - None + * + * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description + * Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of + * different sizes to suit different needs. + * + * Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via + * a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions + * or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of + * operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used. + * + * \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage + * The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical + * application. + * + * \code + * // Create the buffer structure and its underlying storage array + * RingBuffer_t Buffer; + * uint8_t BufferData[128]; + * + * // Initialize the buffer with the created storage array + * RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&Buffer, BufferData, sizeof(BufferData)); + * + * // Insert some data into the buffer + * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'H'); + * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'E'); + * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L'); + * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L'); + * RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'O'); + * + * // Cache the number of stored bytes in the buffer + * uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&Buffer); + * + * // Printer stored data length + * printf("Buffer Length: %d, Buffer Data: \r\n", BufferCount); + * + * // Print contents of the buffer one character at a time + * while (BufferCount--) + * putc(RingBuffer_Remove(&Buffer)); + * \endcode + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __RING_BUFFER_H__ +#define __RING_BUFFER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** \brief Ring Buffer Management Structure. + * + * Type define for a new ring buffer object. Buffers should be initialized via a call to + * \ref RingBuffer_InitBuffer() before use. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t* In; /**< Current storage location in the circular buffer. */ + uint8_t* Out; /**< Current retrieval location in the circular buffer. */ + uint8_t* Start; /**< Pointer to the start of the buffer's underlying storage array. */ + uint8_t* End; /**< Pointer to the end of the buffer's underlying storage array. */ + uint8_t Size; /**< Size of the buffer's underlying storage array. */ + uint16_t Count; /**< Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer. */ + } RingBuffer_t; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes a ring buffer ready for use. Buffers must be initialized via this function + * before any operations are called upon them. Already initialized buffers may be reset + * by re-initializing them using this function. + * + * \param[out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to initialize. + * \param[out] DataPtr Pointer to a global array that will hold the data stored into the ring buffer. + * \param[out] Size Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in the underlying data array. + */ + static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size) + { + GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer); + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + Buffer->In = DataPtr; + Buffer->Out = DataPtr; + Buffer->Start = &DataPtr[0]; + Buffer->End = &DataPtr[Size]; + Buffer->Size = Size; + Buffer->Count = 0; + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + } + + /** Retrieves the current number of bytes stored in a particular buffer. This value is computed + * by entering an atomic lock on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the + * computation takes place. This value should be cached when reading out the contents of the buffer, + * so that as small a time as possible is spent in an atomic lock. + * + * \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the minimum number of bytes + * stored in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus + * the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive reads may safely + * be performed on the buffer. + * + * \param[in] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose count is to be computed. + * + * \return Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) + { + uint16_t Count; + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + Count = Buffer->Count; + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + return Count; + } + + /** Retrieves the free space in a particular buffer. This value is computed by entering an atomic lock + * on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the computation takes place. + * + * \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the maximum number of bytes + * free in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus + * the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive writes may safely + * be performed on the buffer when there is a single writer thread. + * + * \param[in] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose free count is to be computed. + * + * \return Number of free bytes in the buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) + { + return (Buffer->Size - RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer)); + } + + /** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any data. This should + * be tested before removing data from the buffer, to ensure that the buffer does not + * underflow. + * + * If the data is to be removed in a loop, store the total number of bytes stored in the + * buffer (via a call to the \ref RingBuffer_GetCount() function) in a temporary variable + * to reduce the time spent in atomicity locks. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) + { + return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == 0); + } + + /** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any free space. This should + * be tested before storing data to the buffer, to ensure that no data is lost due to a + * buffer overrun. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) + { + return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == Buffer->Size); + } + + /** Inserts an element into the ring buffer. + * + * \note Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may insert into a single buffer + * otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution + * threads. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into. + * \param[in] Data Data element to insert into the buffer. + */ + static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data) + { + GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer); + + *Buffer->In = Data; + + if (++Buffer->In == Buffer->End) + Buffer->In = Buffer->Start; + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + Buffer->Count++; + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + } + + /** Removes an element from the ring buffer. + * + * \note Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may remove from a single buffer + * otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution + * threads. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from. + * + * \return Next data element stored in the buffer. + */ + static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer) + { + GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer); + + uint8_t Data = *Buffer->Out; + + if (++Buffer->Out == Buffer->End) + Buffer->Out = Buffer->Start; + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + Buffer->Count--; + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + + return Data; + } + + /** Returns the next element stored in the ring buffer, without removing it. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from. + * + * \return Next data element stored in the buffer. + */ + static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) + { + return *Buffer->Out; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h index 68e5e9387..ad837e148 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h @@ -1,159 +1,159 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Common USB Device definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_Device
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_Device Device Management
- * \brief USB Device management definitions for USB device mode.
- *
- * USB Device mode related definitions common to all architectures. This module contains definitions which
- * are used when the USB controller is initialized in device mode.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__
-#define __USBDEVICE_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
- #include "StdDescriptors.h"
- #include "USBInterrupt.h"
- #include "Endpoint.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the various states of the USB Device state machine. Only some states are
- * implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement.
- *
- * For information on each possible USB device state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- *
- * \see \ref USB_DeviceState, which stores the current device state machine state.
- */
- enum USB_Device_States_t
- {
- DEVICE_STATE_Unattached = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
- * that the device is not currently connected to a host.
- */
- DEVICE_STATE_Powered = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
- * that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not
- * yet begun.
- */
- DEVICE_STATE_Default = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
- * that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is
- * now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process.
- */
- DEVICE_STATE_Addressed = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
- * that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not
- * yet configured.
- */
- DEVICE_STATE_Configured = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
- * that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready
- * for USB communications to begin.
- */
- DEVICE_STATE_Suspended = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
- * that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device
- * should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is
- * resumed.
- */
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value,
- * index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical
- * prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data.
- *
- * \param[in] wValue The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the
- * lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the
- * case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined
- * in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value.
- * \param[in] wIndex The language ID of the string to return if the \c wValue type indicates
- * \ref DTYPE_String, otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a
- * class-specific standards.
- * \param[out] DescriptorAddress Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to
- * the address of the descriptor.
- * \param[out] MemoryAddressSpace A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory
- * space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one
- * of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used, or on architectures which
- * use a unified address space.
- *
- * \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the \c PROGMEM attribute.
- * If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to
- * allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the \c USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the
- * \c USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D
- * switch.
- *
- * \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise.
- */
- uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress
- #if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) && \
- !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
- , uint8_t* MemoryAddressSpace
- #endif
- ) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/Device_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/Device_UC3.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
- #include "XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Common USB Device definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_Device + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_Device Device Management + * \brief USB Device management definitions for USB device mode. + * + * USB Device mode related definitions common to all architectures. This module contains definitions which + * are used when the USB controller is initialized in device mode. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__ +#define __USBDEVICE_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + #include "StdDescriptors.h" + #include "USBInterrupt.h" + #include "Endpoint.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the various states of the USB Device state machine. Only some states are + * implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement. + * + * For information on each possible USB device state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + * + * \see \ref USB_DeviceState, which stores the current device state machine state. + */ + enum USB_Device_States_t + { + DEVICE_STATE_Unattached = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates + * that the device is not currently connected to a host. + */ + DEVICE_STATE_Powered = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates + * that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not + * yet begun. + */ + DEVICE_STATE_Default = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates + * that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is + * now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process. + */ + DEVICE_STATE_Addressed = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates + * that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not + * yet configured. + */ + DEVICE_STATE_Configured = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates + * that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready + * for USB communications to begin. + */ + DEVICE_STATE_Suspended = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates + * that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device + * should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is + * resumed. + */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value, + * index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical + * prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data. + * + * \param[in] wValue The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the + * lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the + * case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined + * in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value. + * \param[in] wIndex The language ID of the string to return if the \c wValue type indicates + * \ref DTYPE_String, otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a + * class-specific standards. + * \param[out] DescriptorAddress Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to + * the address of the descriptor. + * \param[out] MemoryAddressSpace A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory + * space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one + * of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used, or on architectures which + * use a unified address space. + * + * \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the \c PROGMEM attribute. + * If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to + * allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the \c USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the + * \c USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D + * switch. + * + * \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise. + */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress + #if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) && \ + !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)) + , uint8_t* MemoryAddressSpace + #endif + ) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/Device_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/Device_UC3.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) + #include "XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h index 877f0c138..550414ce3 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h @@ -1,123 +1,123 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing
- * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
- * \brief Endpoint data primitive read/write definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- * from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management
- * \brief USB Endpoint package management definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management
- * \brief Endpoint management definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
- * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
- * send/receive functions for various data types.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__
-#define __ENDPOINT_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
- * numerical address in the device.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK 0x07
-
- /** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
- * direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_EPDIR_MASK 0x80
-
- /** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is
- * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP 0
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
- #include "XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing + * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types + * \brief Endpoint data primitive read/write definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types + * from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management + * \brief USB Endpoint package management definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management + * \brief Endpoint management definitions. + * + * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This + * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data + * send/receive functions for various data types. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__ +#define __ENDPOINT_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * numerical address in the device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK 0x07 + + /** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_EPDIR_MASK 0x80 + + /** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is + * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP 0 + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) + #include "XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h index f360877cf..9afb4d203 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h @@ -1,124 +1,124 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.
- * \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
- * \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
- * and to endpoints.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__
-#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions. */
- enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
- * transfer by the host or device.
- */
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
- * the transfer.
- */
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
- * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
- * has resumed.
- */
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
- * within the software timeout period set by the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
- */
- ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 5, /**< Indicates that the endpoint bank became full or empty before
- * the complete contents of the current stream could be
- * transferred. The endpoint stream function should be called
- * again to process the next chunk of data in the transfer.
- */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions. */
- enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
- ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */
- ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
- * the transfer.
- */
- ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
- * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
- * has resumed.
- */
- };
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
- #include "XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management. + * \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams + * \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from + * and to endpoints. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__ +#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream + * transfer by the host or device. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during + * the transfer. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and + * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus + * has resumed. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 5, /**< Indicates that the endpoint bank became full or empty before + * the complete contents of the current stream could be + * transferred. The endpoint stream function should be called + * again to process the next chunk of data in the transfer. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */ + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during + * the transfer. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and + * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus + * has resumed. + */ + }; + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) + #include "XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h index 6bd7fab20..a7e647dc1 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h @@ -1,139 +1,139 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Common USB Host definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_Host
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_Host Host Management
- * \brief USB Host management definitions for USB host mode.
- *
- * USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
- * the USB controller is initialized in host mode.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBHOST_H__
-#define __USBHOST_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine.
- *
- * For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- * Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states,
- * so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner.
- *
- * \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state.
- */
- enum USB_Host_States_t
- {
- HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice = 0, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for an interval
- * to elapse before continuing with the next step of the device
- * enumeration process.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Unattached = 1, /**< This state indicates that the host state machine is waiting for
- * a device to be attached so that it can start the enumeration process.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Powered = 2, /**< This state indicates that a device has been attached, and the
- * library's internals are being configured to begin the enumeration
- * process.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle = 3, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for the initial
- * settling period to elapse before beginning the enumeration process.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect = 4, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for a connection event
- * from the USB controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached
- * to the bus and is ready to be enumerated.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset = 5, /**< This state indicates that a valid USB device has been attached, and that
- * it will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe = 6, /**< This state indicates that the attached device is currently powered and
- * reset, and that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Default = 7, /**< This state indicates that the stack is currently retrieving the control
- * endpoint's size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered
- * to match.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset = 8, /**< This state indicates that the control pipe is being reconfigured to match
- * the retrieved control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB
- * bus address is being set.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet = 9, /**< This state indicates that the device's address has now been set, and the
- * stack is has now completed the device enumeration process. This state causes
- * the stack to change the current USB device address to that set for the
- * connected device, before progressing to the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state
- * ready for use in the user application.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Addressed = 10, /**< Indicates that the device has been enumerated and addressed, and is now waiting
- * for the user application to configure the device ready for use.
- */
- HOST_STATE_Configured = 11, /**< Indicates that the device has been configured into a valid device configuration,
- * ready for general use by the user application.
- */
- };
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/Host_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/Host_UC3.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Common USB Host definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_Host + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_Host Host Management + * \brief USB Host management definitions for USB host mode. + * + * USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when + * the USB controller is initialized in host mode. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBHOST_H__ +#define __USBHOST_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine. + * + * For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + * Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states, + * so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner. + * + * \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state. + */ + enum USB_Host_States_t + { + HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice = 0, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for an interval + * to elapse before continuing with the next step of the device + * enumeration process. + */ + HOST_STATE_Unattached = 1, /**< This state indicates that the host state machine is waiting for + * a device to be attached so that it can start the enumeration process. + */ + HOST_STATE_Powered = 2, /**< This state indicates that a device has been attached, and the + * library's internals are being configured to begin the enumeration + * process. + */ + HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle = 3, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for the initial + * settling period to elapse before beginning the enumeration process. + */ + HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect = 4, /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for a connection event + * from the USB controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached + * to the bus and is ready to be enumerated. + */ + HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset = 5, /**< This state indicates that a valid USB device has been attached, and that + * it will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration. + */ + HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe = 6, /**< This state indicates that the attached device is currently powered and + * reset, and that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack. + */ + HOST_STATE_Default = 7, /**< This state indicates that the stack is currently retrieving the control + * endpoint's size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered + * to match. + */ + HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset = 8, /**< This state indicates that the control pipe is being reconfigured to match + * the retrieved control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB + * bus address is being set. + */ + HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet = 9, /**< This state indicates that the device's address has now been set, and the + * stack is has now completed the device enumeration process. This state causes + * the stack to change the current USB device address to that set for the + * connected device, before progressing to the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state + * ready for use in the user application. + */ + HOST_STATE_Addressed = 10, /**< Indicates that the device has been enumerated and addressed, and is now waiting + * for the user application to configure the device ready for use. + */ + HOST_STATE_Configured = 11, /**< Indicates that the device has been configured into a valid device configuration, + * ready for general use by the user application. + */ + }; + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/Host_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/Host_UC3.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h index 69caa7c59..59cb36833 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h @@ -1,80 +1,80 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Common USB OTG definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_OTG
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management
- * \brief USB OTG management definitions.
- *
- * This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role
- * exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host
- * roles.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBOTG_H__
-#define __USBOTG_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Common USB OTG definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_OTG + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management + * \brief USB OTG management definitions. + * + * This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role + * exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host + * roles. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBOTG_H__ +#define __USBOTG_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h index 5f82937f4..387ee5042 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h @@ -1,136 +1,136 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Common USB Pipe definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_PipeManagement
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
- * \defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing
- * \brief Pipe data read/write definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
- * \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
- * \brief Pipe data primitive read/write definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- * from and to pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
- * \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management
- * \brief Pipe packet management definitions.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
- * \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management
- * \brief Pipe control request definitions.
- *
- * Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
- * vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
- *
- * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management
- * \brief Pipe management definitions.
- *
- * This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
- * module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
- * for various data types.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __PIPE_H__
-#define __PIPE_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is
- * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros.
- */
- #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE 0
-
- /** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address
- * in the device.
- */
- #define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK 0x07
-
- /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
- * numerical address in the attached device.
- */
- #define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK 0x0F
-
- /** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
- * direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks.
- */
- #define PIPE_EPDIR_MASK 0x80
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/Pipe_UC3.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Common USB Pipe definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_PipeManagement + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement + * \defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing + * \brief Pipe data read/write definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW + * \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types + * \brief Pipe data primitive read/write definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types + * from and to pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement + * \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management + * \brief Pipe packet management definitions. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement + * \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management + * \brief Pipe control request definitions. + * + * Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and + * vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode. + * + * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management + * \brief Pipe management definitions. + * + * This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This + * module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions + * for various data types. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __PIPE_H__ +#define __PIPE_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is + * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros. + */ + #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE 0 + + /** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address + * in the device. + */ + #define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK 0x07 + + /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * numerical address in the attached device. + */ + #define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK 0x0F + + /** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* masks. + */ + #define PIPE_EPDIR_MASK 0x80 + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/Pipe_UC3.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h index ffb2cd46b..5d821f50a 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h @@ -1,100 +1,100 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.
- * \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
- * \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
- * \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
- * and to pipes.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_H__
-#define __PIPE_STREAM_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions. */
- enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
- PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */
- PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
- * the transfer.
- */
- PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
- * within the software timeout period set by the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
- */
- PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 4, /**< Indicates that the pipe bank became full/empty before the
- * complete contents of the stream could be transferred.
- */
- };
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management. + * \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW + * \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams + * \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from + * and to pipes. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_H__ +#define __PIPE_STREAM_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during + * the transfer. + */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 4, /**< Indicates that the pipe bank became full/empty before the + * complete contents of the stream could be transferred. + */ + }; + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c index c6b41a81c..f98ecedc9 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c @@ -1,47 +1,47 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#include "../Device.h"
-
-void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)
-{
- USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
-
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup = true;
- while (AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup);
-}
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#include "../Device.h" + +void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void) +{ + USB_CLK_Unfreeze(); + + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup = true; + while (AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h index 9b324ab69..fa034b576 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h @@ -1,259 +1,259 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_Device_UC3
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Device
- * \defgroup Group_Device_UC3 Device Management (UC3)
- * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR microcontrollers.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__
-#define __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBController.h"
- #include "../StdDescriptors.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
- #include "../Endpoint.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
- * USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
- *
- * \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
- * when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- */
- #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED (1 << 0)
-
- /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
- * USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
- */
- #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED (0 << 0)
-
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
- * USB interface should be initialized in high speed (480Mb/s) mode.
- */
- #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED (1 << 1)
- #endif
- //@}
-
- #if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \
- (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || \
- defined(__DOXYGEN__)))
- /** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
- * This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
- * number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain
- * a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
- * will cause it to use the internal serial number.
- *
- * On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
- * number for the device.
- */
- #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL 0xDC
-
- /** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller
- * model.
- */
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS 120
-
- /** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller
- * model.
- */
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS 0x80800204
- #else
- #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL NO_DESCRIPTOR
-
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS 0
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS 0
- #endif
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
- * be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
- *
- * Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
- * host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
- *
- * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
- * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
- * issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
- * the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
- * compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with
- * the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running
- * before attempting to call this function.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
- */
- void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)
- * the frame number is incremented by one.
- */
- static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UDFNUM.fnum;
- }
-
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- /** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
- * at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI);
- }
-
- /** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI);
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = false;
- #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 3;
- #endif
- }
-
- #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
- static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = false;
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 0;
- }
- #endif
-
- static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.uadd = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden = true;
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden;
- }
-
- #if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
- static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)
- {
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- uint8_t* SigReadAddress = (uint8_t*)INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;
-
- for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)
- {
- uint8_t SerialByte = *SigReadAddress;
-
- if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
- {
- SerialByte >>= 4;
- SigReadAddress++;
- }
-
- SerialByte &= 0x0F;
-
- UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?
- (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));
- }
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
- }
- #endif
-
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_Device_UC3 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Device + * \defgroup Group_Device_UC3 Device Management (UC3) + * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR microcontrollers. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__ +#define __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBController.h" + #include "../StdDescriptors.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + #include "../Endpoint.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode. + * + * \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used + * when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED (0 << 0) + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in high speed (480Mb/s) mode. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED (1 << 1) + #endif + //@} + + #if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \ + (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || \ + defined(__DOXYGEN__))) + /** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device. + * This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port + * number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain + * a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value + * will cause it to use the internal serial number. + * + * On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial + * number for the device. + */ + #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL 0xDC + + /** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller + * model. + */ + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS 120 + + /** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller + * model. + */ + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS 0x80800204 + #else + #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL NO_DESCRIPTOR + + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS 0 + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS 0 + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should + * be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume. + * + * Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the + * host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state. + * + * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it + * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be + * issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e., + * the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + * compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable. + * \n\n + * + * \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with + * the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running + * before attempting to call this function. + * + * \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors. + */ + void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host) + * the frame number is incremented by one. + */ + static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UDFNUM.fnum; + } + + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + /** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus, + * at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode. + * + * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI); + } + + /** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode. + * + * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI); + } + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = false; + #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED) + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 3; + #endif + } + + #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED) + static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls = false; + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 0; + } + #endif + + static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.uadd = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden = true; + } + + static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden; + } + + #if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR) + static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) + { + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + uint8_t* SigReadAddress = (uint8_t*)INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS; + + for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++) + { + uint8_t SerialByte = *SigReadAddress; + + if (SerialCharNum & 0x01) + { + SerialByte >>= 4; + SigReadAddress++; + } + + SerialByte &= 0x0F; + + UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ? + (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte)); + } + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + } + #endif + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c index 3337c7d5c..8e784e96c 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c @@ -1,141 +1,141 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#include "../Endpoint.h"
-
-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
-uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-#endif
-
-volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedEndpoint = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;
-volatile uint8_t* USB_EndpointFIFOPos[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];
-
-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint32_t UECFG0Data)
-{
- Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
- Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
-
- (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = 0;
- (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = UECFG0Data;
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * 0x10000];
-
- return Endpoint_IsConfigured();
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
-{
- for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
- {
- Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);
- (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] = 0;
- (&AVR32_USBB.uecon0clr)[EPNum] = -1;
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[EPNum] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EPNum * 0x10000];
- Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
- }
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
-{
- if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
- {
- while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
- {
- if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
- }
- else
- {
- while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
- {
- if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- }
-}
-
-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
-{
- #if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
- uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
- #else
- uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
- #endif
-
- uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
- {
- if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
- }
- else
- {
- if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
- }
-
- uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
-
- if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
- else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
- else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
-
- uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
-
- if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
- {
- PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
-
- if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
- return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
- }
- }
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#include "../Endpoint.h" + +#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) +uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE; +#endif + +volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedEndpoint = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP; +volatile uint8_t* USB_EndpointFIFOPos[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS]; + +bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, + const uint32_t UECFG0Data) +{ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number); + Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(); + + (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = 0; + (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = UECFG0Data; + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * 0x10000]; + + return Endpoint_IsConfigured(); +} + +void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void) +{ + for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++) + { + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum); + (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] = 0; + (&AVR32_USBB.uecon0clr)[EPNum] = -1; + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[EPNum] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EPNum * 0x10000]; + Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(); + } +} + +void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void) +{ + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + } + else + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return; + } + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + } +} + +#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) +uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void) +{ + #if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF) + uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + #else + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + #endif + + uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(); + + for (;;) + { + if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) + { + if (Endpoint_IsINReady()) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError; + } + else + { + if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError; + } + + uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState; + + if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended; + else if (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled; + + uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(); + + if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber) + { + PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber; + + if (!(TimeoutMSRem--)) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout; + } + } +} +#endif + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h index 5b37b5413..a57a568b7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h @@ -1,876 +1,876 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_UC3
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (UC3)
- * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)
- * \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- * from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 Endpoint Packet Management (UC3)
- * \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_UC3 Endpoint Management (UC3)
- * \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
- * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
- * send/receive functions for various data types.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__
-#define __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBTask.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## EPIndex)
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(EPDetails) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(EPDetails)
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(MaxSize, Banks) (MaxSize)
-
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## EPIndex)
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS2(EPDetails) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS3(EPDetails)
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS3(MaxSize, Banks) (Banks)
-
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR32)
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 7
-
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 256, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 256, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 256, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 256, 2
- #elif defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 8
-
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 512, 3
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP7 512, 3
- #elif defined(USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR32)
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 7
-
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 256, 2
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 256, 2
- #endif
-
- #define ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE (64 * 1024UL)
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST
- ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
- {
- uint8_t MaskVal = 0;
- uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
-
- while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
- {
- MaskVal++;
- CheckBytes <<= 1;
- }
-
- return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_EPSIZE_OFFSET);
- }
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
- bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint32_t UECFGXData);
-
- /* External Variables: */
- extern volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedEndpoint;
- extern volatile uint8_t* USB_EndpointFIFOPos[];
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */
- //@{
- /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
- * should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_OUT
-
- /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
- * should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_IN
- //@}
-
- /** \name Endpoint Bank Mode Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
- * that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results
- * in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's
- * bank at the one time.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_SINGLE
-
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
- * that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results
- * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other
- * accesses the second bank.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_DOUBLE
-
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
- * that the endpoint should have three banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results
- * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other
- * accesses the remaining banks.
- *
- * \note Not available on all AVR models.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANK_TRIPLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_TRIPLE
- #endif
- //@}
-
- #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- /** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size
- * value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE 8
- #endif
-
- /** Retrieves the maximum bank size in bytes of a given endpoint.
- *
- * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants
- * defined by the preprocessor.
- *
- * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex)
-
- /** Retrieves the total number of banks supported by the given endpoint.
- *
- * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants
- * defined by the preprocessor.
- *
- * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex)
-
- #if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
- * be used in the device. Different AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
- * this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP
- #else
- #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 1
- #endif
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
- */
- enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
- * transfer by the host or device.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while
- * waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
- * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
- * has resumed.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
- * within the software timeout period set by the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
- */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size
- * and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
- * on its direction.
- *
- * \param[in] Number Endpoint number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than
- * \ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
- *
- * \param[in] Type Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types
- * are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- *
- * \param[in] Direction Endpoint data direction, either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN.
- * All endpoints (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read
- * from or written to the endpoint bank based on its direction, not both.
- *
- * \param[in] Size Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted
- * to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on
- * the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size
- * that the endpoint can handle.
- *
- * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured, an \c ENDPOINT_BANK_* mask.
- * More banks uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type
- * endpoints <b>must</b> have at least two banks.
- *
- * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in
- * ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to
- * the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as
- * it is automatically configured by the library internally.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint
- * which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Direction,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Direction,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks)
- {
- return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number, (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |
- ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_EPTYPE_OFFSET) |
- ((uint32_t)Direction << AVR32_USBB_EPDIR_OFFSET) |
- ((uint32_t)Banks << AVR32_USBB_EPBK_OFFSET) |
- Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)));
- }
-
- /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
- *
- * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size
- * of the selected AVR model.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].byct;
- }
-
- /** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
- * the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has
- * been manipulated.
- *
- * \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)
- {
- return USB_SelectedEndpoint;
- }
-
- /** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the
- * value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint
- * number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit).
- *
- * Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on
- * the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- USB_SelectedEndpoint = EndpointNumber;
- }
-
- /** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
- * data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uerst |= (AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);
- AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[EndpointNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EndpointNumber * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
- * and from a host.
- *
- * \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uerst |= (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint);
- }
-
- /** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
- * to and from a host.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)
- {
- return ((AVR32_USBB.uerst & (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint)) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for
- * transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
- * \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].nbusybk;
- }
-
- /** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank
- * has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function
- * will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new
- * packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)
- {
- while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].killbks = true;
- while ((&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].killbk);
- }
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
- * bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
- * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
- * is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
- * direction and the endpoint bank is full.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
- * on its direction.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rwall;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].cfgok;
- }
-
- /** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
- * interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
- * masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.
- *
- * \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)
- {
- return ((AVR32_USBB.udint & (AVR32_USBB_EP6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP5INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_EP4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP3INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_EP2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP1INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_OFFSET);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
- * endpoints).
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK << EndpointNumber)) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].txini;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxouti;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi;
- }
-
- /** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
- * endpoint for the next packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true;
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
- * next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].txinic = true;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
- * for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxoutic = true;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;
- USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
- * indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
- * way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
- * aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
- *
- * The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
- * is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
- * endpoint.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqs = true;
- }
-
- /** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqc = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrq;
- }
-
- /** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rstdts = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
- *
- * \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)
- {
- return ((&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].epdir ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
- }
-
- /** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \param[in] DirectionMask New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].epdir = (DirectionMask == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
- }
-
- /** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)
- {
- return *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- }
-
- /** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = Data;
- }
-
- /** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)
- {
- uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)
- {
- uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
- }
-
- /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)
- {
- uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)
- {
- uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);
- *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);
- }
-
- /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++);
- }
-
- /* External Variables: */
- /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
- * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
- * project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
- *
- * If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
- * endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
- * via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
- * read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
- * important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
- * \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
- * be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- */
- #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;
- #else
- #define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
- #endif
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
- * with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
- * simplify user control request handling.
- */
- void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
-
- /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
- * to be read or written to it.
- *
- * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
- *
- * \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
- */
- uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_UC3 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (UC3) + * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3) + * \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types + * from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 Endpoint Packet Management (UC3) + * \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_UC3 Endpoint Management (UC3) + * \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This + * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data + * send/receive functions for various data types. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__ +#define __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBTask.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## EPIndex) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(EPDetails) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(EPDetails) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(MaxSize, Banks) (MaxSize) + + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## EPIndex) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS2(EPDetails) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS3(EPDetails) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS3(MaxSize, Banks) (Banks) + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR32) + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 7 + + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 256, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 256, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 256, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 256, 2 + #elif defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 8 + + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 512, 3 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP7 512, 3 + #elif defined(USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR32) + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 7 + + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, 1 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 256, 2 + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 256, 2 + #endif + + #define ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE (64 * 1024UL) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST + ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) + { + uint8_t MaskVal = 0; + uint16_t CheckBytes = 8; + + while (CheckBytes < Bytes) + { + MaskVal++; + CheckBytes <<= 1; + } + + return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_EPSIZE_OFFSET); + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void); + bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, + const uint32_t UECFGXData); + + /* External Variables: */ + extern volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedEndpoint; + extern volatile uint8_t* USB_EndpointFIFOPos[]; + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */ + //@{ + /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_OUT + + /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_IN + //@} + + /** \name Endpoint Bank Mode Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results + * in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's + * bank at the one time. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_SINGLE + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results + * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other + * accesses the second bank. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_DOUBLE + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have three banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results + * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other + * accesses the remaining banks. + * + * \note Not available on all AVR models. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_TRIPLE AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_TRIPLE + #endif + //@} + + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + /** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size + * value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE 8 + #endif + + /** Retrieves the maximum bank size in bytes of a given endpoint. + * + * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants + * defined by the preprocessor. + * + * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) + + /** Retrieves the total number of banks supported by the given endpoint. + * + * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants + * defined by the preprocessor. + * + * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) + + #if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may + * be used in the device. Different AVR models support different amounts of endpoints, + * this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP + #else + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 1 + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 + */ + enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream + * transfer by the host or device. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while + * waiting for the endpoint to become ready. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and + * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus + * has resumed. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size + * and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending + * on its direction. + * + * \param[in] Number Endpoint number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than + * \ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS. + * + * \param[in] Type Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types + * are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + * + * \param[in] Direction Endpoint data direction, either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN. + * All endpoints (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read + * from or written to the endpoint bank based on its direction, not both. + * + * \param[in] Size Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted + * to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on + * the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size + * that the endpoint can handle. + * + * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured, an \c ENDPOINT_BANK_* mask. + * More banks uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type + * endpoints <b>must</b> have at least two banks. + * + * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in + * ascending order, or bank corruption will occur. + * \n\n + * + * \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to + * the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint. + * \n\n + * + * \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as + * it is automatically configured by the library internally. + * \n\n + * + * \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint + * which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks) + { + return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number, (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK | + ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_EPTYPE_OFFSET) | + ((uint32_t)Direction << AVR32_USBB_EPDIR_OFFSET) | + ((uint32_t)Banks << AVR32_USBB_EPBK_OFFSET) | + Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size))); + } + + /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank. + * + * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size + * of the selected AVR model. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 + * + * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].byct; + } + + /** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save + * the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has + * been manipulated. + * + * \return Index of the currently selected endpoint. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) + { + return USB_SelectedEndpoint; + } + + /** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the + * value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint + * number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit). + * + * Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on + * the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + USB_SelectedEndpoint = EndpointNumber; + } + + /** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's + * data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents. + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + AVR32_USBB.uerst |= (AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber); + AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber); + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[EndpointNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EndpointNumber * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to + * and from a host. + * + * \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). + */ + static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.uerst |= (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint); + } + + /** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it + * to and from a host. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint); + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) + { + return ((AVR32_USBB.uerst & (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedEndpoint)) ? true : false); + } + + /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for + * transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the + * \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].nbusybk; + } + + /** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank + * has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function + * will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new + * packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void) + { + while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].killbks = true; + while ((&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].killbk); + } + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint + * bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN + * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint + * is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN + * direction and the endpoint bank is full. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending + * on its direction. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rwall; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].cfgok; + } + + /** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their + * interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by + * masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>. + * + * \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) + { + return ((AVR32_USBB.udint & (AVR32_USBB_EP6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP5INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_EP4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP3INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_EP2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP1INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_OFFSET); + } + + /** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type + * endpoints). + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK << EndpointNumber)) ? true : false); + } + + /** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].txini; + } + + /** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxouti; + } + + /** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi; + } + + /** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the + * endpoint for the next packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true; + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the + * next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].txinic = true; + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true; + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint + * for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rxoutic = true; + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true; + USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the + * indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a + * way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be + * aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence. + * + * The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro + * is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected + * endpoint. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqs = true; + } + + /** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqc = true; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].stallrq; + } + + /** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */ + static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].rstdts = true; + } + + /** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction. + * + * \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) + { + return ((&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].epdir ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT); + } + + /** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \param[in] DirectionMask New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_SelectedEndpoint].epdir = (DirectionMask == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + } + + /** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) + { + return *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + } + + /** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) + { + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = Data; + } + + /** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) + { + uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1); + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) + { + uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) + { + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) + { + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8); + } + + /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) + { + uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3); + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) + { + uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) + { + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) + { + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16); + *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24); + } + + /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + Dummy = *(USB_EndpointFIFOPos[USB_SelectedEndpoint]++); + } + + /* External Variables: */ + /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address + * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user + * project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode. + * + * If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control + * endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile + * via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically + * read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is + * important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the + * \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token + * be used in the device descriptors to ensure this. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize; + #else + #define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically, + * with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to + * simplify user control request handling. + */ + void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void); + + /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data + * to be read or written to it. + * + * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 + * + * \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void); + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c index a56ef4819..55cd8f991 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c @@ -1,292 +1,292 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C
-#include "../Host.h"
-
-void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)
-{
- uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
- uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
-
- static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;
- static uint8_t PostWaitState;
-
- switch (USB_HostState)
- {
- case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:
- if (WaitMSRemaining)
- {
- if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
- {
- USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
- ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;
- break;
- }
-
- if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))
- USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
- }
-
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Powered:
- WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:
- if (WaitMSRemaining--)
- {
- Delay_MS(1);
- break;
- }
- else
- {
- USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
-
- USB_OTGPAD_On();
- USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();
- USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;
- }
-
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);
-
- USB_Host_ResumeBus();
- Pipe_ClearPipes();
-
- HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);
- }
-
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:
- USB_Host_ResetDevice();
-
- HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:
- Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
- PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
- {
- ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
- SubErrorCode = 0;
- break;
- }
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Default:
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor,
- .wValue = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
- .wIndex = 0,
- .wLength = 8,
- };
-
- uint8_t DataBuffer[8];
-
- if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
- {
- ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
- break;
- }
-
- USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];
-
- USB_Host_ResetDevice();
-
- HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:
- Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP,
- USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
- {
- ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
- SubErrorCode = 0;
- break;
- }
-
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = REQ_SetAddress,
- .wValue = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,
- .wIndex = 0,
- .wLength = 0,
- };
-
- if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
- {
- ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
- break;
- }
-
- HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);
- break;
- case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:
- USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();
- break;
- }
-
- if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))
- {
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);
-
- USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
- USB_ResetInterface();
- }
-}
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)
-{
- bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
- uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;
- bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-
- while (MS)
- {
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- MS--;
- }
-
- if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host))
- {
- ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;
-
- break;
- }
-
- if (Pipe_IsError() == true)
- {
- Pipe_ClearError();
- ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;
-
- break;
- }
-
- if (Pipe_IsStalled() == true)
- {
- Pipe_ClearStall();
- ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;
-
- break;
- }
- }
-
- if (BusSuspended)
- USB_Host_SuspendBus();
-
- if (HSOFIEnabled)
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- return ErrorCode;
-}
-
-static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)
-{
- bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
-
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-
- USB_Host_ResetBus();
- while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));
- USB_Host_ResumeBus();
-
- USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
- bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)
- {
- /* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,
- all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is
- looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still
- present. */
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
- break;
- }
-
- Delay_MS(1);
- }
-
- if (HSOFIEnabled)
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- if (BusSuspended)
- USB_Host_SuspendBus();
-
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-}
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C +#include "../Host.h" + +void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError; + uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError; + + static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining; + static uint8_t PostWaitState; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice: + if (WaitMSRemaining) + { + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful) + { + USB_HostState = PostWaitState; + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage; + break; + } + + if (!(--WaitMSRemaining)) + USB_HostState = PostWaitState; + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered: + WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS; + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle: + if (WaitMSRemaining--) + { + Delay_MS(1); + break; + } + else + { + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(); + + USB_OTGPAD_On(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect; + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect: + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI); + + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + Pipe_ClearPipes(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset); + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset: + USB_Host_ResetDevice(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe: + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, + PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured())) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError; + SubErrorCode = 0; + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default: + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor, + .wValue = (DTYPE_Device << 8), + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 8, + }; + + uint8_t DataBuffer[8]; + + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError; + break; + } + + USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)]; + + USB_Host_ResetDevice(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset: + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, + USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured())) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError; + SubErrorCode = 0; + break; + } + + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetAddress, + .wValue = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError; + break; + } + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet: + USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed; + + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(); + break; + } + + if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)) + { + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } +} + +uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS) +{ + bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(); + uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful; + bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + + while (MS) + { + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + MS--; + } + + if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host)) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect; + + break; + } + + if (Pipe_IsError() == true) + { + Pipe_ClearError(); + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError; + + break; + } + + if (Pipe_IsStalled() == true) + { + Pipe_ClearStall(); + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled; + + break; + } + } + + if (BusSuspended) + USB_Host_SuspendBus(); + + if (HSOFIEnabled) + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + return ErrorCode; +} + +static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void) +{ + bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_Host_ResetBus(); + while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete())); + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + + USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--) + { + /* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset, + all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is + looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still + present. */ + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + break; + } + + Delay_MS(1); + } + + if (HSOFIEnabled) + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + if (BusSuspended) + USB_Host_SuspendBus(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h index 4bcba566b..6191559db 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h @@ -1,372 +1,372 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_Host_UC3B
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Host
- * \defgroup Group_Host_UC3B Host Management (UC3B)
- * \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.
- *
- * Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 32-bit AVR UC3B microcontrollers.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBHOST_UC3B_H__
-#define __USBHOST_UC3B_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../StdDescriptors.h"
- #include "../Pipe.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in
- * host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time
- * and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a
- * fixed value is specified by the library.
- */
- #define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS 1
-
- #if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached
- * device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the
- * library will return a timeout error code.
- *
- * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
- * \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
- */
- #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS 1000
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library
- * will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds
- * after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will
- * occur.
- *
- * The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the
- * \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the
- * compiler using the -D switch.
- */
- #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS 1000
- #endif
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
- */
- enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This
- * error may be the result of an attached device drawing
- * too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the
- * AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient
- * current.
- */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
- */
- enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
- {
- HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid
- * ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()
- * event.
- */
- HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed
- * to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other
- * error.
- */
- HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines
- * indicating the attachment of a device.
- */
- HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to
- * complete successfully.
- */
- HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to
- * configure correctly.
- */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended)
- * the frame number is incremented by one.
- */
- static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB_UHFNUM;
- }
-
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- /** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
- * at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- }
-
- /** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
- }
- #endif
-
- /** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.
- * USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).
- *
- * If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be
- * woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has
- * completed.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset;
- }
-
- /** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission
- * of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the
- * host and attached device may occur.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = true;
- }
-
- /** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached
- * device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame
- * messages to the device.
- *
- * \note While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that
- * some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = false;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,
- * false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,
- * except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or
- * false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void)
- {
- return (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.speed == AVR32_USBB_SPEED_FULL);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting
- * that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rxrsmi;
- }
-
- /** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */
- static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rxrsmic = true;
- }
-
- /** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to
- * a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to
- * be resumed.
- */
- static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached
- * device.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume;
- }
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void)
- {
- // Not required for UC3B
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void)
- {
- // Not required for UC3B
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = false;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p0 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p1 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p2 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p3 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p4 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p5 = Address;
- AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p6 = Address;
- }
-
- /* Enums: */
- enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t
- {
- HOST_WAITERROR_Successful = 0,
- HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,
- HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError = 2,
- HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled = 3,
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);
- uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);
-
- #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)
- static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);
- #endif
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_Host_UC3B + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Host + * \defgroup Group_Host_UC3B Host Management (UC3B) + * \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers. + * + * Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 32-bit AVR UC3B microcontrollers. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBHOST_UC3B_H__ +#define __USBHOST_UC3B_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../StdDescriptors.h" + #include "../Pipe.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in + * host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time + * and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a + * fixed value is specified by the library. + */ + #define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS 1 + + #if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached + * device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the + * library will return a timeout error code. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS 1000 + #endif + + #if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library + * will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds + * after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will + * occur. + * + * The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the + * \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the + * compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS 1000 + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event. + * + * \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event. + */ + enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This + * error may be the result of an attached device drawing + * too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the + * AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient + * current. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event. + * + * \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event. + */ + enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid + * ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() + * event. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed + * to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other + * error. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines + * indicating the attachment of a device. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to + * complete successfully. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to + * configure correctly. + */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended) + * the frame number is incremented by one. + */ + static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB_UHFNUM; + } + + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + /** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus, + * at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode. + * + * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + } + + /** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode. + * + * \note Not available when the NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI); + } + #endif + + /** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host. + * USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured). + * + * If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be + * woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset = true; + } + + /** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has + * completed. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset; + } + + /** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission + * of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the + * host and attached device may occur. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = true; + } + + /** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached + * device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame + * messages to the device. + * + * \note While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that + * some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = false; + } + + /** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro, + * false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed, + * except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe; + } + + /** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or + * false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s). + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) + { + return (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.speed == AVR32_USBB_SPEED_FULL); + } + + /** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting + * that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rxrsmi; + } + + /** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */ + static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rxrsmic = true; + } + + /** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to + * a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to + * be resumed. + */ + static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume = true; + } + + /** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached + * device. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume; + } + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) + { + // Not required for UC3B + } + + static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) + { + // Not required for UC3B + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = false; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) + { + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p0 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p1 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p2 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p3 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p4 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p5 = Address; + AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p6 = Address; + } + + /* Enums: */ + enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_WAITERROR_Successful = 0, + HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1, + HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError = 2, + HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled = 3, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void); + uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS); + + #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C) + static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void); + #endif + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c index 83d3fd6ad..b1db1fc50 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c @@ -1,138 +1,138 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#include "../Pipe.h"
-
-uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-
-volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedPipe = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE;
-volatile uint8_t* USB_PipeFIFOPos[PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES];
-
-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Token,
- const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks)
-{
- Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
- Pipe_EnablePipe();
-
- (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = 0;
- (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |
- ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET) |
- ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) |
- ((uint32_t)Banks << AVR32_USBB_PBK_OFFSET) |
- ((EndpointNumber & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET));
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * 0x10000];
-
- Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
-
- return Pipe_IsConfigured();
-}
-
-void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)
-{
- for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
- {
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
- (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] = 0;
- (&AVR32_USBB.upcon0clr)[PNum] = -1;
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[PNum] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PNum * 0x10000];
- Pipe_DisablePipe();
- }
-}
-
-bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
-{
- uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
-
- for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
- {
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
-
- if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
- continue;
-
- if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress)
- return true;
- }
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);
- return false;
-}
-
-uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)
-{
- #if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
- uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
- #else
- uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
- #endif
-
- uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
- {
- if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
- return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
- }
- else
- {
- if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
- return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
- }
-
- if (Pipe_IsStalled())
- return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;
- else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
- return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
-
- uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
-
- if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
- {
- PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
-
- if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
- return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;
- }
- }
-}
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#include "../Pipe.h" + +uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE; + +volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedPipe = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE; +volatile uint8_t* USB_PipeFIFOPos[PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES]; + +bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Token, + const uint8_t EndpointNumber, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks) +{ + Pipe_SelectPipe(Number); + Pipe_EnablePipe(); + + (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = 0; + (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK | + ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET) | + ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) | + ((uint32_t)Banks << AVR32_USBB_PBK_OFFSET) | + ((EndpointNumber & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET)); + USB_PipeFIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * 0x10000]; + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + return Pipe_IsConfigured(); +} + +void Pipe_ClearPipes(void) +{ + for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++) + { + Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum); + (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] = 0; + (&AVR32_USBB.upcon0clr)[PNum] = -1; + USB_PipeFIFOPos[PNum] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PNum * 0x10000]; + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + } +} + +bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) +{ + uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(); + + for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++) + { + Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum); + + if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured())) + continue; + + if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress) + return true; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber); + return false; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void) +{ + #if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF) + uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + #else + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + #endif + + uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(); + + for (;;) + { + if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN) + { + if (Pipe_IsINReceived()) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError; + } + else + { + if (Pipe_IsOUTReady()) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError; + } + + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled; + else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected; + + uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(); + + if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber) + { + PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber; + + if (!(TimeoutMSRem--)) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout; + } + } +} + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h index 25a4586d8..f8700383c 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h @@ -1,928 +1,928 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_UC3
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
- * \defgroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (UC3)
- * \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
- * \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)
- * \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- * from and to pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
- * \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 Pipe Packet Management (UC3)
- * \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
- * \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_UC3 Pipe Control Request Management (UC3)
- * \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
- * vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
- *
- * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
- * \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_UC3 Pipe Management (UC3)
- * \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
- *
- * This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
- * module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
- * for various data types.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __PIPE_UC3_H__
-#define __PIPE_UC3_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBTask.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE (64 * 1024UL)
-
- /* External Variables: */
- extern volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedPipe;
- extern volatile uint8_t* USB_PipeFIFOPos[];
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW (AVR32_USBB_UPSTA0_OVERFI_MASK << 8)
-
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_CRC16_MASK
-
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_TIMEOUT_MASK
-
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_PID_MASK
-
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATAPID_MASK
-
- /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */
- #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATATGL_MASK
- //@}
-
- /** \name Pipe Token Masks */
- //@{
- /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),
- * which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.
- */
- #define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_SETUP
-
- /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
- * indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.
- */
- #define PIPE_TOKEN_IN AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_IN
-
- /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
- * indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.
- */
- #define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_OUT
- //@}
-
- /** \name Pipe Bank Mode Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
- * should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results in slower transfers as
- * only one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access the pipe's bank at the one time.
- */
- #define PIPE_BANK_SINGLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_SINGLE
-
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe
- * should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers as one
- * USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the second
- * bank.
- */
- #define PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_DOUBLE
-
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the
- * pipe should have three banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers
- * as one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the
- * remaining banks.
- *
- * \note Not available on all AVR models.
- */
- #define PIPE_BANK_TRIPLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_TRIPLE
- #endif
- //@}
-
- /** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value
- * in the device descriptor of the attached device.
- */
- #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE 64
-
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in
- * the device.
- */
- #define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES 8
- #else
- #define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES 7
- #endif
-
- /** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR
- * model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support
- * different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the
- * currently selected UC3 AVR model.
- */
- #define PIPE_MAX_SIZE 256
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
- */
- enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */
- PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */
- PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */
- PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
- * within the software timeout period set by the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
- */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.
- *
- * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum pipe bank size
- * of the selected AVR model.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pbyct;
- }
-
- /** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the
- * currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.
- *
- * \return Index of the currently selected pipe.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void)
- {
- return USB_SelectedPipe;
- }
-
- /** Selects the given pipe number. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe number to be
- * indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.
- *
- * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe to select.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber)
- {
- USB_SelectedPipe = PipeNumber;
- }
-
- /** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.
- *
- * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe to reset.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uprst |= (AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);
- AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from
- * an attached device.
- *
- * \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().
- */
- static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uprst |= (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe);
- }
-
- /** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and
- * from an attached device.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void)
- {
- return ((AVR32_USBB.uprst & (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.
- *
- * \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].ptoken;
- }
-
- /** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_*
- * masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during
- * control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices
- * which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.
- *
- * \param[in] Token New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].ptoken = Token;
- }
-
- /** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */
- static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inmode = true;
- }
-
- /** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be
- * accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.
- *
- * \param[in] TotalINRequests Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inmode = false;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inrq = TotalINRequests;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].cfgok;
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected
- * pipe is bound to.
- *
- * \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void)
- {
- return ((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pepnum |
- ((Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN) ? PIPE_EPDIR_MASK : 0));
- }
-
- /** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.
- *
- * \param[in] Milliseconds Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].intfrq = Milliseconds;
- }
-
- /** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should
- * be serviced.
- *
- * \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void)
- {
- return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P5INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_P4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P3INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_P2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P1INT_MASK |
- AVR32_USBB_P0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_P0INT_OFFSET);
- }
-
- /** Determines if the specified pipe number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
- * pipes).
- *
- * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t PipeNumber)
- {
- return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P0INTES_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */
- static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreezec = true;
- }
-
- /** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */
- static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0SET)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreezes = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void)
- {
- return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreeze) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_SelectedPipe] = 0;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].overfic = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that
- * some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.
- *
- * \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void)
- {
- return (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_SelectedPipe] &
- (AVR32_USBB_PERRI_MASK | AVR32_USBB_OVERFI_MASK)) ? true : false);
- }
-
- /** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This
- * value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.
- *
- * \return Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void)
- {
-
- return (((&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_SelectedPipe] &
- (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT |
- PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID |
- PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) |
- (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_SelectedPipe] << 8) &
- PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW));
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for
- * transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
- * \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].nbusybk;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe
- * bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT
- * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe
- * is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT
- * direction and the pipe bank is full.
- *
- * \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending
- * on its direction.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rwall;
- }
-
- /** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxini;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].txouti;
- }
-
- /** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected
- * CONTROL type pipe.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].txstpi;
- }
-
- /** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].txstpic = true;
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected
- * pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxinic = true;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing
- * the bank ready for the next packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].txoutic = true;
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on
- * the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device
- * is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been
- * received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet
- * can be re-sent.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].nakedi;
- }
-
- /** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].nakedic = true;
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void)
- {
- return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxstalldi;
- }
-
- /** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the
- * STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void)
- {
- (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxstalldic = true;
- USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
- }
-
- /** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void)
- {
- return *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- }
-
- /** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = Data;
- }
-
- /** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void)
- {
- uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void)
- {
- uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
- }
-
- /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void)
- {
- uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void)
- {
- uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
-
- return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);
- *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);
- }
-
- /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
- */
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void)
- {
- uint8_t Dummy;
-
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++);
- }
-
- /* External Variables: */
- /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address
- * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device
- * descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached
- * to the USB bus.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- */
- extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Configures the specified pipe number with the given pipe type, token, target endpoint number in the
- * attached device, bank size and banking mode.
- *
- * A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()
- * before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or
- * sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite
- * numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to
- * \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().
- *
- * \param[in] Number Pipe number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than \ref PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES.
- *
- * \param[in] Type Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low
- * Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- *
- * \param[in] Token Pipe data token, either \ref PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, \ref PIPE_TOKEN_OUT or \ref PIPE_TOKEN_IN.
- * All pipes (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read from or
- * written to the pipe bank based on its direction, not both.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint index within the attached device that the pipe should interface to.
- *
- * \param[in] Size Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to
- * the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on
- * the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that
- * the pipe can handle.
- *
- * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured, a \c PIPE_BANK_* mask. More banks
- * uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type pipes <b>must</b>
- * have at least two banks.
- *
- * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order,
- * or bank corruption will occur.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's
- * index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is
- * automatically configured by the library internally.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which
- * failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
- */
- bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Token,
- const uint8_t EndpointNumber,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks);
-
- /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packed of data to be read
- * or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).
- *
- * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
- *
- * \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
- */
- uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);
-
- /** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given
- * endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found,
- * \c false otherwise.
- */
- bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
- #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP 0
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
- {
- uint8_t MaskVal = 0;
- uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
-
- while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE))
- {
- MaskVal++;
- CheckBytes <<= 1;
- }
-
- return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_PSIZE_OFFSET);
- }
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_UC3 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW + * \defgroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (UC3) + * \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW + * \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3) + * \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types + * from and to pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement + * \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 Pipe Packet Management (UC3) + * \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq + * \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_UC3 Pipe Control Request Management (UC3) + * \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and + * vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode. + * + * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement + * \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_UC3 Pipe Management (UC3) + * \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture. + * + * This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This + * module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions + * for various data types. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __PIPE_UC3_H__ +#define __PIPE_UC3_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBTask.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE (64 * 1024UL) + + /* External Variables: */ + extern volatile uint32_t USB_SelectedPipe; + extern volatile uint8_t* USB_PipeFIFOPos[]; + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW (AVR32_USBB_UPSTA0_OVERFI_MASK << 8) + + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_CRC16_MASK + + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_TIMEOUT_MASK + + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_PID_MASK + + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATAPID_MASK + + /** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATATGL_MASK + //@} + + /** \name Pipe Token Masks */ + //@{ + /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes), + * which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_SETUP + + /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes), + * indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_IN AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_IN + + /** Token mask for \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes), + * indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_OUT + //@} + + /** \name Pipe Bank Mode Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe + * should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results in slower transfers as + * only one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access the pipe's bank at the one time. + */ + #define PIPE_BANK_SINGLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_SINGLE + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe + * should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers as one + * USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the second + * bank. + */ + #define PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_DOUBLE + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the + * pipe should have three banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers + * as one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the + * remaining banks. + * + * \note Not available on all AVR models. + */ + #define PIPE_BANK_TRIPLE AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PBK_TRIPLE + #endif + //@} + + /** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value + * in the device descriptor of the attached device. + */ + #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE 64 + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in + * the device. + */ + #define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES 8 + #else + #define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES 7 + #endif + + /** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR + * model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support + * different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the + * currently selected UC3 AVR model. + */ + #define PIPE_MAX_SIZE 256 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 + */ + enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t + { + PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank. + * + * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum pipe bank size + * of the selected AVR model. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 + * + * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pbyct; + } + + /** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the + * currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated. + * + * \return Index of the currently selected pipe. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) + { + return USB_SelectedPipe; + } + + /** Selects the given pipe number. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe number to be + * indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe. + * + * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe to select. + */ + static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) + { + USB_SelectedPipe = PipeNumber; + } + + /** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags. + * + * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe to reset. + */ + static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t PipeNumber) + { + AVR32_USBB.uprst |= (AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber); + AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber); + USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from + * an attached device. + * + * \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). + */ + static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.uprst |= (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe); + } + + /** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and + * from an attached device. + */ + static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe); + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) + { + return ((AVR32_USBB.uprst & (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false); + } + + /** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type. + * + * \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].ptoken; + } + + /** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_* + * masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during + * control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices + * which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device. + * + * \param[in] Token New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask. + */ + static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].ptoken = Token; + } + + /** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */ + static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inmode = true; + } + + /** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be + * accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen. + * + * \param[in] TotalINRequests Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing. + */ + static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inmode = false; + (&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_SelectedPipe].inrq = TotalINRequests; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].cfgok; + } + + /** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected + * pipe is bound to. + * + * \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) + { + return ((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pepnum | + ((Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN) ? PIPE_EPDIR_MASK : 0)); + } + + /** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds. + * + * \param[in] Milliseconds Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll. + */ + static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_SelectedPipe].intfrq = Milliseconds; + } + + /** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should + * be serviced. + * + * \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) + { + return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P5INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_P4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P3INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_P2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P1INT_MASK | + AVR32_USBB_P0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_P0INT_OFFSET); + } + + /** Determines if the specified pipe number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type + * pipes). + * + * \param[in] PipeNumber Index of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t PipeNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t PipeNumber) + { + return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P0INTES_MASK << USB_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false); + } + + /** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */ + static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreezec = true; + } + + /** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */ + static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0SET)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreezes = true; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) + { + return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0)[USB_SelectedPipe].pfreeze) ? true : false); + } + + /** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_SelectedPipe] = 0; + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].overfic = true; + } + + /** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that + * some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe. + * + * \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) + { + return (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_SelectedPipe] & + (AVR32_USBB_PERRI_MASK | AVR32_USBB_OVERFI_MASK)) ? true : false); + } + + /** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This + * value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred. + * + * \return Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) + { + + return (((&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_SelectedPipe] & + (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT | + PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID | + PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) | + (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_SelectedPipe] << 8) & + PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW)); + } + + /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for + * transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the + * \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].nbusybk; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe + * bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT + * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe + * is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT + * direction and the pipe bank is full. + * + * \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending + * on its direction. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rwall; + } + + /** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxini; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].txouti; + } + + /** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected + * CONTROL type pipe. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].txstpi; + } + + /** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].txstpic = true; + USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected + * pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxinic = true; + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true; + USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing + * the bank ready for the next packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].txoutic = true; + (&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true; + USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on + * the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device + * is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been + * received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet + * can be re-sent. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].nakedi; + } + + /** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details. + */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].nakedic = true; + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) + { + return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxstalldi; + } + + /** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the + * STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device). + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) + { + (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_SelectedPipe].rxstalldic = true; + USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE]; + } + + /** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) + { + return *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + } + + /** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) + { + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = Data; + } + + /** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) + { + uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1); + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) + { + uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) + { + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) + { + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8); + } + + /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) + { + uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3); + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) + { + uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + + return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) + { + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) + { + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16); + *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24); + } + + /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. + * + * \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 + */ + static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + Dummy = *(USB_PipeFIFOPos[USB_SelectedPipe]++); + } + + /* External Variables: */ + /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address + * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device + * descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached + * to the USB bus. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Configures the specified pipe number with the given pipe type, token, target endpoint number in the + * attached device, bank size and banking mode. + * + * A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze() + * before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or + * sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite + * numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to + * \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(). + * + * \param[in] Number Pipe number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than \ref PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES. + * + * \param[in] Type Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low + * Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + * + * \param[in] Token Pipe data token, either \ref PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, \ref PIPE_TOKEN_OUT or \ref PIPE_TOKEN_IN. + * All pipes (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read from or + * written to the pipe bank based on its direction, not both. + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint index within the attached device that the pipe should interface to. + * + * \param[in] Size Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to + * the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on + * the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that + * the pipe can handle. + * + * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured, a \c PIPE_BANK_* mask. More banks + * uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type pipes <b>must</b> + * have at least two banks. + * + * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order, + * or bank corruption will occur. + * \n\n + * + * \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's + * index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe. + * \n\n + * + * \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is + * automatically configured by the library internally. + * \n\n + * + * \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which + * failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise. + */ + bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Token, + const uint8_t EndpointNumber, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks); + + /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packed of data to be read + * or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect). + * + * \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 + * + * \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void); + + /** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given + * endpoint is found, it is automatically selected. + * + * \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found, + * \c false otherwise. + */ + bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP) + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP 0 + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) + { + uint8_t MaskVal = 0; + uint16_t CheckBytes = 8; + + while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE)) + { + MaskVal++; + CheckBytes <<= 1; + } + + return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_PSIZE_OFFSET); + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Pipe_ClearPipes(void); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c index 1472dd6a8..93ed03ecf 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c @@ -1,215 +1,215 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C
-#include "../USBController.h"
-
-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
-#endif
-
-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
-#endif
-
-void USB_Init(
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- const uint8_t Mode
- #endif
-
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- ,
- #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- void
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- const uint8_t Options
- #endif
- )
-{
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- USB_Options = Options;
- #endif
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = true;
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
- USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
- }
- else
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;
- USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
- }
- #else
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;
- #endif
-
- USB_IsInitialized = true;
-
- USB_ResetInterface();
-}
-
-void USB_Disable(void)
-{
- USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
- USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-
- USB_Detach();
- USB_Controller_Disable();
-
- USB_OTGPAD_Off();
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
- #endif
-
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[3].cen = false;
-
- USB_IsInitialized = false;
-}
-
-void USB_ResetInterface(void)
-{
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide;
- #endif
-
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].pllsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC);
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].oscsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0);
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].diven = (F_USB != USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ);
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].div = (F_USB == USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) ? 0 : (uint32_t)(((F_USB / USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) - 1) / 2);
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].cen = true;
-
- USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
- USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-
- USB_Controller_Reset();
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- if (UIDModeSelectEnabled)
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
- #endif
-
- USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
-
- if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
- {
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = true;
-
- USB_Init_Device();
- #endif
- }
- else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
- {
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = false;
-
- USB_Init_Host();
- #endif
- }
-
- USB_OTGPAD_On();
-}
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-static void USB_Init_Device(void)
-{
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
- USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
- #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
- USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = false;
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
- USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
- USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
-
- if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
- #endif
-
- if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
- {
- USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
- }
- else
- {
- #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
- if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
- USB_Device_SetHighSpeed();
- else
- USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
- #else
- USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
- #endif
- }
-
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
-
- Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize,
- ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-
- USB_Attach();
-}
-#endif
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-static void USB_Init_Host(void)
-{
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
- USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
- USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-
- USB_Host_HostMode_On();
-
- USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
-
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DCONNI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
-
- USB_Attach();
-}
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C +#include "../USBController.h" + +#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) +volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None; +#endif + +#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) +volatile uint8_t USB_Options; +#endif + +void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ) +{ + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + USB_Options = Options; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = true; + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI); + USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(); + } + else + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false; + USB_CurrentMode = Mode; + } + #else + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false; + #endif + + USB_IsInitialized = true; + + USB_ResetInterface(); +} + +void USB_Disable(void) +{ + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_Detach(); + USB_Controller_Disable(); + + USB_OTGPAD_Off(); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None; + #endif + + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[3].cen = false; + + USB_IsInitialized = false; +} + +void USB_ResetInterface(void) +{ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide; + #endif + + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].pllsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC); + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].oscsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0); + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].diven = (F_USB != USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ); + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].div = (F_USB == USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) ? 0 : (uint32_t)(((F_USB / USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) - 1) / 2); + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].cen = true; + + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_Controller_Reset(); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (UIDModeSelectEnabled) + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI); + #endif + + USB_CLK_Unfreeze(); + + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + { + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = true; + + USB_Init_Device(); + #endif + } + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host) + { + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = false; + + USB_Init_Host(); + #endif + } + + USB_OTGPAD_On(); +} + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) +static void USB_Init_Device(void) +{ + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached; + USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP) + USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = false; + #endif + + #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER) + USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false; + #endif + + #if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr; + + if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR) + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size; + #endif + + if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED) + { + USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(); + } + else + { + #if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED) + if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED) + USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(); + else + USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(); + #else + USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(); + #endif + } + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI); + + USB_Attach(); +} +#endif + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) +static void USB_Init_Host(void) +{ + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached; + USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE; + + USB_Host_HostMode_On(); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI); + + USB_Attach(); +} +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h index c2f85b8af..565517842 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h @@ -1,383 +1,383 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_USBManagement_UC3
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement
- * \defgroup Group_USBManagement_UC3 USB Interface Management (UC3)
- * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__
-#define __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBMode.h"
- #include "../Events.h"
- #include "../USBTask.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- #include "../Host.h"
- #include "../OTG.h"
- #include "../Pipe.h"
- #include "../HostStandardReq.h"
- #include "../PipeStream.h"
- #endif
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- #include "../Device.h"
- #include "../Endpoint.h"
- #include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"
- #include "../EndpointStream.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(F_USB)
- #error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the clock input to the USB module.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name USB Controller Option Masks */
- //@{
- /** Selects one of the system's main clock oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source
- * generation module. This indicates that an external oscillator should be used directly instead of an
- * internal PLL clock source.
- */
- #define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC (1 << 2)
-
- /** Selects one of the system's PLL oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source
- * generation module. This indicates that one of the device's PLL outputs should be used instead of an
- * external oscillator source.
- */
- #define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_PLL (0 << 2)
-
- /** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 0 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */
- #define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0 (1 << 3)
-
- /** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 1 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */
- #define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_1 (0 << 3)
- //@}
-
- /** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_CONTROL 0x00
-
- /** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS 0x01
-
- /** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_BULK 0x02
-
- /** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT 0x03
- //@}
-
- #if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
- * (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
- * is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
- *
- * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
- */
- #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS 100
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power).
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void)
- {
- return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbus;
- }
-
- /** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
- * attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
- * enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
- */
- static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Detach(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = true;
- }
-
- /** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
- * USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
- * will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
- *
- * This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
- * attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
- * register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
- */
- static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Attach(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = false;
- }
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
- * allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
- * host mode.
- *
- * As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
- * the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
- * device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
- * that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
- * enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
- * until after this has occurred.
- *
- * Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
- * interface reset and re-enumeration.
- *
- * \param[in] Mode This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value
- * from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
- *
- * \param[in] Options Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
- * interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of
- * a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
- * PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
- * mode speed.
- *
- * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,
- * the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY
- * (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler
- * via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
- * function prototype.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required,
- * the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of
- * this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
- * defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
- * parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
- */
- void USB_Init(
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- const uint8_t Mode
- #endif
-
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- ,
- #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- void
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- const uint8_t Options
- #endif
- );
-
- /** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
- * memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
- * is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
- */
- void USB_Disable(void);
-
- /** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
- * to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
- */
- void USB_ResetInterface(void);
-
- /* Global Variables: */
- #if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the
- * \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the
- * currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller
- * is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time
- * options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to
- * a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the
- * USB interface is not initialized.
- */
- extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
- #elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
- #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host
- #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
- #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
- * was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- */
- extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
- #elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- #define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
- #endif
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the
- * user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.
- */
- enum USB_Modes_t
- {
- USB_MODE_None = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */
- USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */
- USB_MODE_Host = 2, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Host mode. */
- USB_MODE_UID = 3, /**< Indicates that the controller should determine the USB mode from the UID pin of the
- * USB connector.
- */
- };
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)
- #define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ 12000000UL
- #else
- #define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ 48000000UL
- #endif
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- static void USB_Init_Device(void);
- #endif
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- static void USB_Init_Host(void);
- #endif
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = false;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = false;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)
- {
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;
- }
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)
- {
- if (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.id)
- return USB_MODE_Device;
- else
- return USB_MODE_Host;
- }
- #endif
-
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_USBManagement_UC3 + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement + * \defgroup Group_USBManagement_UC3 USB Interface Management (UC3) + * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__ +#define __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBMode.h" + #include "../Events.h" + #include "../USBTask.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "../Host.h" + #include "../OTG.h" + #include "../Pipe.h" + #include "../HostStandardReq.h" + #include "../PipeStream.h" + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "../Device.h" + #include "../Endpoint.h" + #include "../DeviceStandardReq.h" + #include "../EndpointStream.h" + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + #if !defined(F_USB) + #error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the clock input to the USB module. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name USB Controller Option Masks */ + //@{ + /** Selects one of the system's main clock oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source + * generation module. This indicates that an external oscillator should be used directly instead of an + * internal PLL clock source. + */ + #define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC (1 << 2) + + /** Selects one of the system's PLL oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source + * generation module. This indicates that one of the device's PLL outputs should be used instead of an + * external oscillator source. + */ + #define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_PLL (0 << 2) + + /** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 0 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */ + #define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0 (1 << 3) + + /** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 1 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */ + #define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_1 (0 << 3) + //@} + + /** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_CONTROL 0x00 + + /** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS 0x01 + + /** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_BULK 0x02 + + /** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT 0x03 + //@} + + #if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions + * (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream + * is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS 100 + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power). + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) + { + return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbus; + } + + /** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any + * attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from + * enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called. + */ + static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Detach(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = true; + } + + /** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached + * USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device + * will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device. + * + * This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the + * attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode + * register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode. + */ + static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Attach(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = false; + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will + * allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in + * host mode. + * + * As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes, + * the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In + * device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure + * that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be + * enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device + * until after this has occurred. + * + * Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB + * interface reset and re-enumeration. + * + * \param[in] Mode This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value + * from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum. + * + * \param[in] Options Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB + * interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of + * a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the + * PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device + * mode speed. + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required, + * the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY + * (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler + * via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the + * function prototype. + * \n\n + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required, + * the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of + * this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token, + * defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this + * parameter does not exist in the function prototype. + * + * \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks. + */ + void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ); + + /** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO + * memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface + * is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function. + */ + void USB_Disable(void); + + /** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected + * to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode. + */ + void USB_ResetInterface(void); + + /* Global Variables: */ + #if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the + * \ref USB_Modes_t enum. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + * \n\n + * + * \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the + * currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller + * is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time + * options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to + * a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the + * USB interface is not initialized. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode; + #elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) + #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host + #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) + #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init() + * was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options; + #elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + #define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the + * user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode. + */ + enum USB_Modes_t + { + USB_MODE_None = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */ + USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */ + USB_MODE_Host = 2, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Host mode. */ + USB_MODE_UID = 3, /**< Indicates that the controller should determine the USB mode from the UID pin of the + * USB connector. + */ + }; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) + #define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ 12000000UL + #else + #define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ 48000000UL + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C) + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + static void USB_Init_Device(void); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + static void USB_Init_Host(void); + #endif + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = true; + } + + static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = false; + } + + static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = true; + } + + static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = false; + } + + static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true; + } + + static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false; + } + + static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) + { + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false; + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true; + } + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) + { + if (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.id) + return USB_MODE_Device; + else + return USB_MODE_Host; + } + #endif + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c index 93d23c3da..d92011ff6 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c @@ -1,202 +1,202 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
-{
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = false;
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = false;
-
- AVR32_USBB.uhinteclr = -1;
- AVR32_USBB.udinteclr = -1;
-}
-
-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
-{
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic = true;
-
- AVR32_USBB.uhintclr = -1;
- AVR32_USBB.udintclr = -1;
-}
-
-ISR(USB_GEN_vect)
-{
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
- }
- #endif
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
-
- if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())
- {
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
- EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
- }
- else
- {
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
- EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
- }
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI))
- {
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
-
- USB_CLK_Freeze();
-
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
- EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI))
- {
- USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
-
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
-
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
-
- if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
- else
- USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
-
- EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
-
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
- USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
-
- USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);
- Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize,
- ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
- }
- #endif
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame();
- }
- #endif
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
- USB_ResetInterface();
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
-
- USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
- USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DCONNI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
- USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DCONNI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();
-
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
- USB_ResetInterface();
- }
- #endif
-
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
-
- if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
-
- if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)
- EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
-
- USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
- USB_ResetInterface();
-
- EVENT_USB_UIDChange();
- }
- #endif
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBInterrupt.h" + +void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void) +{ + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = false; + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = false; + + AVR32_USBB.uhinteclr = -1; + AVR32_USBB.udinteclr = -1; +} + +void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void) +{ + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true; + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic = true; + + AVR32_USBB.uhintclr = -1; + AVR32_USBB.udintclr = -1; +} + +ISR(USB_GEN_vect) +{ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI); + + EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(); + } + #endif + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI); + + if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus()) + { + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered; + EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(); + } + else + { + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached; + EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(); + } + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI)) + { + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI); + + USB_CLK_Freeze(); + + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended; + EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(); + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI)) + { + USB_CLK_Unfreeze(); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI); + + if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber) + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured; + else + USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered; + + EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(); + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI); + + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Default; + USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI); + + USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0); + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(); + } + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame(); + } + #endif + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + + EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip); + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached; + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DCONNI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DCONNI); + + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered; + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI); + + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0); + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI); + + if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(); + + if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached) + EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(); + + USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(); + USB_ResetInterface(); + + EVENT_USB_UIDChange(); + } + #endif +} diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h index 2cebf4106..268eaa827 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h @@ -1,353 +1,353 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
- * from the USB controller.
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__
-#define __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Enums: */
- enum USB_Interrupts_t
- {
- USB_INT_VBUSTI = 0,
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- USB_INT_IDTI = 1,
- #endif
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2,
- USB_INT_SUSPI = 3,
- USB_INT_EORSTI = 4,
- USB_INT_SOFI = 5,
- #endif
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- USB_INT_HSOFI = 6,
- USB_INT_DCONNI = 7,
- USB_INT_DDISCI = 8,
- USB_INT_RSTI = 9,
- USB_INT_BCERRI = 10,
- USB_INT_VBERRI = 11,
- #endif
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = true;
- break;
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- case USB_INT_IDTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = true;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.wakeupes = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SUSPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.suspes = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_EORSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.eorstes = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.sofes = true;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- case USB_INT_HSOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.hsofies = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DCONNI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.dconnies = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DDISCI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.ddiscies = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_RSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.rsties = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_BCERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_VBERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre = true;
- break;
- #endif
- }
- }
-
- static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = false;
- break;
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- case USB_INT_IDTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = false;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.wakeupec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SUSPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.suspec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_EORSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.eorstec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.sofec = true;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- case USB_INT_HSOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.hsofiec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DCONNI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.dconniec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DDISCI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.ddisciec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_RSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.rstiec = true;
- break;
- case USB_INT_BCERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre = false;
- break;
- case USB_INT_VBERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre = false;
- break;
- #endif
- }
- }
-
- static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
- break;
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- case USB_INT_IDTI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.wakeupc = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SUSPI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.suspc = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_EORSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.eorstc = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.sofc = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- case USB_INT_HSOFI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.hsofic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DCONNI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.dconnic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_DDISCI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.ddiscic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_RSTI:
- AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rstic = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_BCERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.bcerric = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
- break;
- case USB_INT_VBERRI:
- AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vberric = true;
- (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
- break;
- #endif
- }
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste;
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- case USB_INT_IDTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.wakeupe;
- case USB_INT_SUSPI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.suspe;
- case USB_INT_EORSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.eorste;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.sofe;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- case USB_INT_HSOFI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.hsofie;
- case USB_INT_DCONNI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.dconnie;
- case USB_INT_DDISCI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.ddiscie;
- case USB_INT_RSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.rstie;
- case USB_INT_BCERRI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre;
- case USB_INT_VBERRI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre;
- #endif
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbusti;
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- case USB_INT_IDTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.idti;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
- case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.wakeup;
- case USB_INT_SUSPI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.susp;
- case USB_INT_EORSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.eorst;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.sof;
- #endif
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
- case USB_INT_HSOFI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.hsofi;
- case USB_INT_DCONNI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.dconni;
- case USB_INT_DDISCI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.ddisci;
- case USB_INT_RSTI:
- return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rsti;
- case USB_INT_BCERRI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.bcerri;
- case USB_INT_VBERRI:
- return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vberri;
- #endif
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../USBMode.h"
- #include "../Events.h"
- #include "../USBController.h"
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
- void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* ISR Prototypes: */
- #if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Interrupt service routine handler for the USB controller ISR group. This interrupt routine <b>must</b> be
- * linked to the entire USB controller ISR vector group inside the AVR32's interrupt controller peripheral,
- * using the user application's preferred USB controller driver.
- */
- void USB_GEN_vect(void);
- #else
- ISR(USB_GEN_vect);
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts + * from the USB controller. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__ +#define __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Enums: */ + enum USB_Interrupts_t + { + USB_INT_VBUSTI = 0, + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + USB_INT_IDTI = 1, + #endif + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2, + USB_INT_SUSPI = 3, + USB_INT_EORSTI = 4, + USB_INT_SOFI = 5, + #endif + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + USB_INT_HSOFI = 6, + USB_INT_DCONNI = 7, + USB_INT_DDISCI = 8, + USB_INT_RSTI = 9, + USB_INT_BCERRI = 10, + USB_INT_VBERRI = 11, + #endif + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_VBUSTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = true; + break; + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + case USB_INT_IDTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = true; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + case USB_INT_WAKEUPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.wakeupes = true; + break; + case USB_INT_SUSPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.suspes = true; + break; + case USB_INT_EORSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.eorstes = true; + break; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.sofes = true; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + case USB_INT_HSOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.hsofies = true; + break; + case USB_INT_DCONNI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.dconnies = true; + break; + case USB_INT_DDISCI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.ddiscies = true; + break; + case USB_INT_RSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.rsties = true; + break; + case USB_INT_BCERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre = true; + break; + case USB_INT_VBERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre = true; + break; + #endif + } + } + + static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_VBUSTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste = false; + break; + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + case USB_INT_IDTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte = false; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + case USB_INT_WAKEUPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.wakeupec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_SUSPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.suspec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_EORSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.eorstec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.sofec = true; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + case USB_INT_HSOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.hsofiec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_DCONNI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.dconniec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_DDISCI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.ddisciec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_RSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.rstiec = true; + break; + case USB_INT_BCERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre = false; + break; + case USB_INT_VBERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre = false; + break; + #endif + } + } + + static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_VBUSTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR; + break; + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + case USB_INT_IDTI: + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + case USB_INT_WAKEUPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.wakeupc = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_SUSPI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.suspc = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_EORSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.eorstc = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.sofc = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR; + break; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + case USB_INT_HSOFI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.hsofic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_DCONNI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.dconnic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_DDISCI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.ddiscic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_RSTI: + AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rstic = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR; + break; + case USB_INT_BCERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.bcerric = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR; + break; + case USB_INT_VBERRI: + AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vberric = true; + (void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR; + break; + #endif + } + } + + static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_VBUSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste; + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + case USB_INT_IDTI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + case USB_INT_WAKEUPI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.wakeupe; + case USB_INT_SUSPI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.suspe; + case USB_INT_EORSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.eorste; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.sofe; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + case USB_INT_HSOFI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.hsofie; + case USB_INT_DCONNI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.dconnie; + case USB_INT_DDISCI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.ddiscie; + case USB_INT_RSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.rstie; + case USB_INT_BCERRI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre; + case USB_INT_VBERRI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre; + #endif + } + + return false; + } + + static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_VBUSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbusti; + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + case USB_INT_IDTI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.idti; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + case USB_INT_WAKEUPI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.wakeup; + case USB_INT_SUSPI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.susp; + case USB_INT_EORSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.eorst; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.sof; + #endif + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + case USB_INT_HSOFI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.hsofi; + case USB_INT_DCONNI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.dconni; + case USB_INT_DDISCI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.ddisci; + case USB_INT_RSTI: + return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rsti; + case USB_INT_BCERRI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.bcerri; + case USB_INT_VBERRI: + return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vberri; + #endif + } + + return false; + } + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../USBMode.h" + #include "../Events.h" + #include "../USBController.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void); + void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void); + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* ISR Prototypes: */ + #if defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Interrupt service routine handler for the USB controller ISR group. This interrupt routine <b>must</b> be + * linked to the entire USB controller ISR vector group inside the AVR32's interrupt controller peripheral, + * using the user application's preferred USB controller driver. + */ + void USB_GEN_vect(void); + #else + ISR(USB_GEN_vect); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h index 290ed9f08..28faee5bf 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h @@ -1,82 +1,82 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Common USB Controller definitions for all architectures.
- * \copydetails Group_USBManagement
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USB
- * \defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management
- * \brief USB Controller definitions for general USB controller management.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_H__
-#define __USBCONTROLLER_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/USBController_UC3.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
- #include "XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Common USB Controller definitions for all architectures. + * \copydetails Group_USBManagement + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USB + * \defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management + * \brief USB Controller definitions for general USB controller management. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_H__ +#define __USBCONTROLLER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/USBController_UC3.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) + #include "XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h index c69d15a84..f0b3181c7 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h @@ -1,73 +1,73 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management.
- *
- * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
- * from the USB controller.
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__
-#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "USBMode.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Architecture Includes: */
- #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
- #include "AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
- #include "UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h"
- #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
- #include "XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management. + * + * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts + * from the USB controller. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__ +#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Architecture Includes: */ + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + #include "AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3) + #include "UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h" + #elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) + #include "XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h" + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c index 55598ffaf..e00afd1c0 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c @@ -1,44 +1,44 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#include "../Device.h"
-
-void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)
-{
- USB.CTRLB |= USB_RWAKEUP_bm;
-}
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#include "../Device.h" + +void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void) +{ + USB.CTRLB |= USB_RWAKEUP_bm; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h index 4b438911e..0cc53e1d4 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h @@ -1,238 +1,238 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_Device_XMEGA
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_Device
- * \defgroup Group_Device_XMEGA Device Management (XMEGA)
- * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__
-#define __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBController.h"
- #include "../StdDescriptors.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
- #include "../Endpoint.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- #if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
- #error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
- * USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
- *
- * \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.
- * \n
- *
- * \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
- * when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- */
- #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED (1 << 0)
-
- /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
- * USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
- */
- #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED (0 << 0)
- //@}
-
- /** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
- * This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
- * number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain
- * a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
- * will cause it to use the internal serial number.
- *
- * On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
- * number for the device.
- */
- #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL 0xDC
-
- /** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller
- * model.
- */
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS (8 * (1 + (offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, COORDY1) - offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0))))
-
- /** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller
- * model.
- */
- #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0)
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
- * be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
- *
- * Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
- * host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
- *
- * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
- * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
- * issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
- * the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
- * compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with
- * the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running
- * before attempting to call this function.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
- */
- void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)
- * the frame number is incremented by one.
- */
- static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)
- {
- return (((uint16_t)USB_EndpointTable.FRAMENUMH << 8) | USB_EndpointTable.FRAMENUML);
- }
-
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- /** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
- * at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm;
- }
-
- /** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
- * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
- *
- * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
- */
- static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)
- {
- USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;
- }
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_SPEED_bm;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLA |= USB_SPEED_bm;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
- {
- USB.ADDR = Address;
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)
- {
- return ((USB.ADDR != 0) ? true : false);
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
- static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)
- {
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;
-
- for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)
- {
- uint8_t SerialByte;
-
- NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
- SerialByte = pgm_read_byte(SigReadAddress);
-
- if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
- {
- SerialByte >>= 4;
- SigReadAddress++;
- }
-
- SerialByte &= 0x0F;
-
- UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?
- (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));
- }
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
- }
-
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_Device_XMEGA + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_Device + * \defgroup Group_Device_XMEGA Device Management (XMEGA) + * \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__ +#define __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBController.h" + #include "../StdDescriptors.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + #include "../Endpoint.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + #if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)) + #error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode. + * + * \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models. + * \n + * + * \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used + * when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED (0 << 0) + //@} + + /** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device. + * This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port + * number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain + * a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value + * will cause it to use the internal serial number. + * + * On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial + * number for the device. + */ + #define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL 0xDC + + /** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller + * model. + */ + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS (8 * (1 + (offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, COORDY1) - offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0)))) + + /** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller + * model. + */ + #define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should + * be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume. + * + * Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the + * host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state. + * + * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it + * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be + * issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e., + * the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + * compile time option is used, this macro is unavailable. + * \n\n + * + * \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with + * the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running + * before attempting to call this function. + * + * \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors. + */ + void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host) + * the frame number is incremented by one. + */ + static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) + { + return (((uint16_t)USB_EndpointTable.FRAMENUMH << 8) | USB_EndpointTable.FRAMENUML); + } + + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + /** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus, + * at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode. + * + * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm; + } + + /** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the + * \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode. + * + * \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined. + */ + static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) + { + USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm; + } + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) + { + USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_SPEED_bm; + } + + static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) + { + USB.CTRLA |= USB_SPEED_bm; + } + + static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) + { + USB.ADDR = Address; + } + + static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) + { + return ((USB.ADDR != 0) ? true : false); + } + + static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) + { + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS; + + for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++) + { + uint8_t SerialByte; + + NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc; + SerialByte = pgm_read_byte(SigReadAddress); + + if (SerialCharNum & 0x01) + { + SerialByte >>= 4; + SigReadAddress++; + } + + SerialByte &= 0x0F; + + UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ? + (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte)); + } + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + } + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c index daace9697..3eb156ca6 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c @@ -1,67 +1,67 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-
-#include "../Endpoint.h"
-
-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
-uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
-#endif
-
-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t UECFG0XData,
- const uint8_t UECFG1XData)
-{
- return false; // TODO
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
-{
- // TODO
-}
-
-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
-{
- // TODO
-}
-
-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
-{
- return 0; // TODO
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#include "../Endpoint.h" + +#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) +uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE; +#endif + +bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t UECFG0XData, + const uint8_t UECFG1XData) +{ + return false; // TODO +} + +void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void) +{ + // TODO +} + +void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void) +{ + // TODO +} + +#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) +uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void) +{ + return 0; // TODO +} +#endif + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h index 2a2d4f28d..4e7592a2f 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h @@ -1,773 +1,773 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (XMEGA)
- * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (XMEGA)
- * \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
- * from and to endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Packet Management (XMEGA)
- * \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
- * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Management (XMEGA)
- * \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
- *
- * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
- * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
- * send/receive functions for various data types.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__
-#define __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBTask.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Macros: */
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) 1023
- #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) 2
-
- #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 16
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST
- ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
- {
- uint8_t MaskVal = 0;
- uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
-
- while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
- {
- MaskVal++;
- CheckBytes <<= 1;
- }
-
- return (MaskVal << USB_EP_BUFSIZE_gp);
- }
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
- bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t UECFG0XData,
- const uint8_t UECFG1XData);
-
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */
- //@{
- /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
- * should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT false
-
- /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint
- * should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN true
- //@}
-
- /** \name Endpoint Bank Mode Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
- * that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results
- * in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's
- * bank at the one time.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE 0
-
- /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates
- * that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results
- * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other
- * accesses the second bank.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE USB_EP_BANK_bm
- //@}
-
- #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- /** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size
- * value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE 8
- #endif
-
- /** Retrieves the maximum bank size in bytes of a given endpoint.
- *
- * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants
- * defined by the preprocessor.
- *
- * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex)
-
- /** Retrieves the total number of banks supported by the given endpoint.
- *
- * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants
- * defined by the preprocessor.
- *
- * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1)
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex)
-
- #if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
- * be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
- * this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
- */
- #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP
- #else
- #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 1
- #endif
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
- */
- enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
- * transfer by the host or device.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while
- * waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
- * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
- * has resumed.
- */
- ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
- * within the software timeout period set by the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
- */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size
- * and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
- * on its direction.
- *
- * \param[in] Number Endpoint number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than
- * \ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
- *
- * \param[in] Type Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types
- * are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
- *
- * \param[in] Direction Endpoint data direction, either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN.
- * All endpoints (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read
- * from or written to the endpoint bank based on its direction, not both.
- *
- * \param[in] Size Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted
- * to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on
- * the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size
- * that the endpoint can handle.
- *
- * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured, an \c ENDPOINT_BANK_* mask.
- * More banks uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type
- * endpoints <b>must</b> have at least two banks.
- *
- * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in
- * ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to
- * the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as
- * it is automatically configured by the library internally.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint
- * which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Direction,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Direction,
- const uint16_t Size,
- const uint8_t Banks)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
- *
- * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size
- * of the selected AVR model.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
- * the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has
- * been manipulated.
- *
- * \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the
- * value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint
- * number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit).
- *
- * Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on
- * the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
- * data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
- * and from a host.
- *
- * \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
- * to and from a host.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for
- * transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
- * \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank
- * has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function
- * will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new
- * packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
- * bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
- * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
- * is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
- * direction and the endpoint bank is full.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
- * on its direction.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
- * interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
- * masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.
- *
- * \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
- * endpoints).
- *
- * \param[in] EndpointNumber Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
- * endpoint for the next packet.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
- * next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
- * for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
- * indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
- * way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
- * aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
- *
- * The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
- * is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
- * endpoint.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
- */
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
- *
- * \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
- *
- * \param[in] DirectionMask New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)
- {
- return 0; // TODO
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
- * direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
- */
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)
- {
- // TODO
- }
-
- /* External Variables: */
- /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
- * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
- * project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
- *
- * If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
- * endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
- * via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
- * read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
- * important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
- * \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
- * be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- */
- #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
- extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;
- #else
- #define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
- #endif
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
- * with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
- * simplify user control request handling.
- */
- void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
-
- /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
- * to be read or written to it.
- *
- * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
- *
- * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
- *
- * \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
- */
- uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (XMEGA) + * \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (XMEGA) + * \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types + * from and to endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Packet Management (XMEGA) + * \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement + * \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Management (XMEGA) + * \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture. + * + * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This + * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data + * send/receive functions for various data types. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__ +#define __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBTask.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) 1023 + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) 2 + + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP 16 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST + ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) + { + uint8_t MaskVal = 0; + uint16_t CheckBytes = 8; + + while (CheckBytes < Bytes) + { + MaskVal++; + CheckBytes <<= 1; + } + + return (MaskVal << USB_EP_BUFSIZE_gp); + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void); + bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t UECFG0XData, + const uint8_t UECFG1XData); + + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */ + //@{ + /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT false + + /** Endpoint data direction mask for \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN true + //@} + + /** \name Endpoint Bank Mode Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results + * in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's + * bank at the one time. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE 0 + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results + * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other + * accesses the second bank. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE USB_EP_BANK_bm + //@} + + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + /** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size + * value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE 8 + #endif + + /** Retrieves the maximum bank size in bytes of a given endpoint. + * + * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants + * defined by the preprocessor. + * + * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(EPIndex) + + /** Retrieves the total number of banks supported by the given endpoint. + * + * \note This macro will only work correctly on endpoint indexes that are compile-time constants + * defined by the preprocessor. + * + * \param[in] EPIndex Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (\ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED(EPIndex) _ENDPOINT_GET_BANKS(EPIndex) + + #if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may + * be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints, + * this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS ENDPOINT_DETAILS_MAXEP + #else + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 1 + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA + */ + enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream + * transfer by the host or device. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while + * waiting for the endpoint to become ready. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and + * no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus + * has resumed. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size + * and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending + * on its direction. + * + * \param[in] Number Endpoint number to configure. This must be more than 0 and less than + * \ref ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS. + * + * \param[in] Type Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types + * are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification. + * + * \param[in] Direction Endpoint data direction, either \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN. + * All endpoints (except Control type) are unidirectional - data may only be read + * from or written to the endpoint bank based on its direction, not both. + * + * \param[in] Size Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted + * to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on + * the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size + * that the endpoint can handle. + * + * \param[in] Banks Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured, an \c ENDPOINT_BANK_* mask. + * More banks uses more USB DPRAM, but offers better performance. Isochronous type + * endpoints <b>must</b> have at least two banks. + * + * \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in + * ascending order, or bank corruption will occur. + * \n\n + * + * \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to + * the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint. + * \n\n + * + * \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as + * it is automatically configured by the library internally. + * \n\n + * + * \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint + * which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, + const uint8_t Banks) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank. + * + * \note The return width of this function may differ, depending on the maximum endpoint bank size + * of the selected AVR model. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save + * the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has + * been manipulated. + * + * \return Index of the currently selected endpoint. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the + * value should be masked with the \ref ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint + * number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit). + * + * Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on + * the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number to select. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's + * data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents. + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to + * and from a host. + * + * \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). + */ + static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it + * to and from a host. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for + * transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the + * \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank + * has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function + * will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new + * packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint + * bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN + * direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint + * is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN + * direction and the endpoint bank is full. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending + * on its direction. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their + * interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by + * masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>. + * + * \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type + * endpoints). + * + * \param[in] EndpointNumber Index of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t EndpointNumber) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the + * endpoint for the next packet. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the + * next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint + * for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the + * indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a + * way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be + * aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence. + * + * The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro + * is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected + * endpoint. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise. + */ + static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */ + static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction. + * + * \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \param[in] DirectionMask New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) + { + return 0; // TODO + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + * + * \param[in] Data Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) + { + // TODO + } + + /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) + { + // TODO + } + + /* External Variables: */ + /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address + * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user + * project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode. + * + * If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control + * endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile + * via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically + * read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is + * important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the + * \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token + * be used in the device descriptors to ensure this. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize; + #else + #define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically, + * with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to + * simplify user control request handling. + */ + void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void); + + /** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data + * to be read or written to it. + * + * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA + * + * \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void); + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c index d58ad2dfb..b9d9d7699 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c @@ -1,37 +1,37 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c index 515c38df5..4144a06c5 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c @@ -1,37 +1,37 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c index d58ad2dfb..b9d9d7699 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c @@ -1,37 +1,37 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBMode.h"
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBMode.h" + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c index 570898a3a..68f645b89 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c @@ -1,83 +1,83 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
-
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,
- uint16_t Length)
-{
- uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
-
- if (!(Length))
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
-
- while (Length)
- {
- uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
-
- if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
- else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
- else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
-
- if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
- {
- while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
- {
- TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
- TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
- Length--;
- }
-
- Endpoint_ClearOUT();
- }
- }
-
- while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
- {
- uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
-
- if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
- else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
- }
-
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME) + +uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer, + uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)); + + if (!(Length)) + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + while (Length) + { + uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState; + + if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended; + else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted; + + if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()) + { + while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream); + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1); + Length--; + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + } + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady())) + { + uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState; + + if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended; + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError; +} + +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE +#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME +#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE + +#endif diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c index d1b5f7a06..5d4fc42f2 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c @@ -1,92 +1,92 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
-
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,
- uint16_t Length)
-{
- uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
- bool LastPacketFull = false;
-
- if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
- Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
- else if (!(Length))
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
-
- while (Length || LastPacketFull)
- {
- uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
-
- if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
- else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
- else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
- else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
- break;
-
- if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
- {
- uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
-
- while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))
- {
- TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
- TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
- Length--;
- BytesInEndpoint++;
- }
-
- LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);
- Endpoint_ClearIN();
- }
- }
-
- while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
- {
- uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
-
- if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
- else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
- }
-
- return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME) + +uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer, + uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)); + bool LastPacketFull = false; + + if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength) + Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength; + else if (!(Length)) + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + while (Length || LastPacketFull) + { + uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState; + + if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended; + else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted; + else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()) + break; + + if (Endpoint_IsINReady()) + { + uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); + + while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize)) + { + TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream); + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1); + Length--; + BytesInEndpoint++; + } + + LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + } + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())) + { + uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState; + + if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended; + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError; +} + +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE +#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME +#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE + +#endif diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c index ef9e8eaad..9ce034007 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c @@ -1,88 +1,88 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
-
-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
- uint16_t Length,
- uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
-{
- uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
- uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
- uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
- if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
- return ErrorCode;
-
- if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
- {
- Length -= *BytesProcessed;
- TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
- }
-
- while (Length)
- {
- if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- {
- TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
-
- if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
- {
- *BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
- return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
- }
-
- #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
- USB_USBTask();
- #endif
-
- if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
- return ErrorCode;
- }
- else
- {
- TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
- TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
- Length--;
- BytesInTransfer++;
- }
- }
-
- return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
-}
-
-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME) + +uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer, + uint16_t Length, + uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)); + uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + if (BytesProcessed != NULL) + { + Length -= *BytesProcessed; + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed); + } + + while (Length) + { + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT(); + + if (BytesProcessed != NULL) + { + *BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer; + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer; + } + + #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) + USB_USBTask(); + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + else + { + TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream); + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1); + Length--; + BytesInTransfer++; + } + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE +#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE +#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET +#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE + +#endif diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c index dcb506b2b..9f44dc46a 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c @@ -1,169 +1,169 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C
-#include "../USBController.h"
-
-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
-#endif
-
-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
-#endif
-
-USB_EP_TABLE_t USB_EndpointTable ATTR_ALIGNED(2);
-
-void USB_Init(
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
- const uint8_t Mode
- #endif
-
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- ,
- #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- void
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- const uint8_t Options
- #endif
- )
-{
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- USB_Options = Options;
- #endif
-
- USB_IsInitialized = true;
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
- USB.CAL0 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL0));
- NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
- USB.CAL1 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL1));
-
- if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
- USB.INTCTRLA = (3 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
- else if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED)
- USB.INTCTRLA = (2 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
- else
- USB.INTCTRLA = (1 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
-
- USB_ResetInterface();
-}
-
-void USB_Disable(void)
-{
- USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
- USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-
- USB_Detach();
- USB_Controller_Disable();
-
- USB_IsInitialized = false;
-}
-
-void USB_ResetInterface(void)
-{
- if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
- CLK.USBCTRL = ((((F_USB / 6000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp) | CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm);
- else
- CLK.USBCTRL = ((((F_USB / 48000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp) | CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm);
-
- USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
- USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
-
- USB_Controller_Reset();
- USB_Init_Device();
-}
-
-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
-static void USB_Init_Device(void)
-{
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
- USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
- #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
- USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = false;
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
- USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
- USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
-
- #if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
- !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
- uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;
-
- if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
- {
- if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
- else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
- else
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
- }
- #else
- if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
- {
- #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
- #elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
- #else
- USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
- #endif
- }
- #endif
- #endif
-
- if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
- USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
- else
- USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
-
- Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize,
- ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI);
-
- USB_Attach();
-}
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C +#include "../USBController.h" + +#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) +volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None; +#endif + +#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) +volatile uint8_t USB_Options; +#endif + +USB_EP_TABLE_t USB_EndpointTable ATTR_ALIGNED(2); + +void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ) +{ + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + USB_Options = Options; + #endif + + USB_IsInitialized = true; + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc; + USB.CAL0 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL0)); + NVM.CMD = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc; + USB.CAL1 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL1)); + + if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH) + USB.INTCTRLA = (3 << USB_INTLVL_gp); + else if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED) + USB.INTCTRLA = (2 << USB_INTLVL_gp); + else + USB.INTCTRLA = (1 << USB_INTLVL_gp); + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + + USB_ResetInterface(); +} + +void USB_Disable(void) +{ + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_Detach(); + USB_Controller_Disable(); + + USB_IsInitialized = false; +} + +void USB_ResetInterface(void) +{ + if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED) + CLK.USBCTRL = ((((F_USB / 6000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp) | CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm); + else + CLK.USBCTRL = ((((F_USB / 48000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp) | CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm); + + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_Controller_Reset(); + USB_Init_Device(); +} + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) +static void USB_Init_Device(void) +{ + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached; + USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP) + USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = false; + #endif + + #if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER) + USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false; + #endif + + #if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr; + + #if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \ + !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)) + uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace; + + if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR) + { + if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH) + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM) + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + else + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size; + } + #else + if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR) + { + #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size; + #elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + #else + USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + #endif + } + #endif + #endif + + if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED) + USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(); + else + USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI); + + USB_Attach(); +} +#endif diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h index f6c4a7aa8..6b6c39a2c 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h @@ -1,319 +1,319 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- * \copydetails Group_USBManagement_XMEGA
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement
- * \defgroup Group_USBManagement_XMEGA USB Interface Management (XMEGA)
- * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__
-#define __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
- #include "../USBMode.h"
- #include "../Events.h"
- #include "../USBTask.h"
- #include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* External Variables: */
- extern USB_EP_TABLE_t USB_EndpointTable;
- #endif
-
- /* Includes: */
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- #include "../Device.h"
- #include "../Endpoint.h"
- #include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"
- #include "../EndpointStream.h"
- #endif
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(F_USB)
- #error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile.
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** \name USB Controller Option Masks */
- //@{
- /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be low priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
- * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
- */
- #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRILOW ((0 << 1) | (0 << 1))
-
- /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be medium priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
- * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
- */
- #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED ((0 << 1) | (1 << 1))
-
- /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be high priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
- * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
- */
- #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH ((1 << 1) | (0 << 1))
- //@}
-
- /** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */
- //@{
- /** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_CONTROL 0x00
-
- /** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS 0x01
-
- /** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_BULK 0x02
-
- /** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.
- *
- * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
- */
- #define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT 0x03
- //@}
-
- #if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
- * (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
- * is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
- *
- * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
- * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
- */
- #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS 100
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
- * attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
- * enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
- */
- static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Detach(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLB &= ~USB_ATTACH_bm;
- }
-
- /** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
- * USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
- * will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
- *
- * This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
- * attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
- * register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
- */
- static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Attach(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLB |= USB_ATTACH_bm;
- }
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
- * allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
- * host mode.
- *
- * As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
- * the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
- * device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
- * that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
- * enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
- * until after this has occurred.
- *
- * Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
- * interface reset and re-enumeration.
- *
- * \param[in] Mode This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value
- * from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
- *
- * \param[in] Options Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
- * interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of
- * a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
- * PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
- * mode speed.
- *
- * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,
- * the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY
- * (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler
- * via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
- * function prototype.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required,
- * the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of
- * this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
- * defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
- * parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB
- * AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.
- *
- * \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
- */
- void USB_Init(
- #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- const uint8_t Mode
- #endif
-
- #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- ,
- #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
- void
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- const uint8_t Options
- #endif
- );
-
- /** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
- * memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
- * is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
- */
- void USB_Disable(void);
-
- /** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
- * to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
- */
- void USB_ResetInterface(void);
-
- /* Global Variables: */
- #if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the
- * \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- * \n\n
- *
- * \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the
- * currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller
- * is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time
- * options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to
- * a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the
- * USB interface is not initialized.
- */
- extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
- #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
- #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device
- #endif
-
- #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
- * was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
- *
- * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
- * changed in value.
- */
- extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
- #elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
- #define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
- #endif
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the
- * user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.
- */
- enum USB_Modes_t
- {
- USB_MODE_None = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */
- USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */
- };
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)
- static void USB_Init_Device(void);
- #endif
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLA |= (USB_ENABLE_bm | USB_STFRNUM_bm | USB_MAXEP_gm);
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;
- }
-
- static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)
- {
- USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;
- USB.CTRLA |= USB_ENABLE_bm;
- }
-
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * \copydetails Group_USBManagement_XMEGA + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement + * \defgroup Group_USBManagement_XMEGA USB Interface Management (XMEGA) + * \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface. + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__ +#define __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../USBMode.h" + #include "../Events.h" + #include "../USBTask.h" + #include "../USBInterrupt.h" + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* External Variables: */ + extern USB_EP_TABLE_t USB_EndpointTable; + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "../Device.h" + #include "../Endpoint.h" + #include "../DeviceStandardReq.h" + #include "../EndpointStream.h" + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + #if !defined(F_USB) + #error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** \name USB Controller Option Masks */ + //@{ + /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be low priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend + * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus. + */ + #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRILOW ((0 << 1) | (0 << 1)) + + /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be medium priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend + * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus. + */ + #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED ((0 << 1) | (1 << 1)) + + /** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be high priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend + * and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus. + */ + #define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH ((1 << 1) | (0 << 1)) + //@} + + /** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */ + //@{ + /** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_CONTROL 0x00 + + /** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS 0x01 + + /** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_BULK 0x02 + + /** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT 0x03 + //@} + + #if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions + * (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream + * is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS 100 + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any + * attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from + * enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called. + */ + static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Detach(void) + { + USB.CTRLB &= ~USB_ATTACH_bm; + } + + /** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached + * USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device + * will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device. + * + * This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the + * attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode + * register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode. + */ + static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Attach(void) + { + USB.CTRLB |= USB_ATTACH_bm; + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will + * allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in + * host mode. + * + * As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes, + * the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In + * device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure + * that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be + * enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device + * until after this has occurred. + * + * Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB + * interface reset and re-enumeration. + * + * \param[in] Mode This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value + * from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum. + * + * \param[in] Options Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB + * interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of + * a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the + * PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device + * mode speed. + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required, + * the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY + * (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler + * via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the + * function prototype. + * \n\n + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required, + * the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of + * this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token, + * defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this + * parameter does not exist in the function prototype. + * \n\n + * + * \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB + * AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware. + * + * \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks. + */ + void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ); + + /** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO + * memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface + * is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function. + */ + void USB_Disable(void); + + /** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected + * to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode. + */ + void USB_ResetInterface(void); + + /* Global Variables: */ + #if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the + * \ref USB_Modes_t enum. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + * \n\n + * + * \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the + * currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller + * is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time + * options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to + * a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the + * USB interface is not initialized. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode; + #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) + #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init() + * was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options; + #elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + #define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the + * user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode. + */ + enum USB_Modes_t + { + USB_MODE_None = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */ + USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */ + }; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C) + static void USB_Init_Device(void); + #endif + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) + { + USB.CTRLA |= (USB_ENABLE_bm | USB_STFRNUM_bm | USB_MAXEP_gm); + } + + static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) + { + USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm; + } + + static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) + { + USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm; + USB.CTRLA |= USB_ENABLE_bm; + } + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c index b52a716d6..dccdf2e45 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c @@ -1,100 +1,100 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
-#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
-
-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
-{
- USB.INTCTRLA = 0;
- USB.INTCTRLB = 0;
-}
-
-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
-{
- USB.INTFLAGSACLR = 0xFF;
- USB.INTFLAGSBCLR = 0xFF;
-}
-
-ISR(USB_BUSEVENT_vect)
-{
- #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
-
- EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
- }
- #endif
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend);
-
- #if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
- EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
- #else
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
- EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
- #endif
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume);
-
- if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
- else
- USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
-
- #if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
- EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
- #else
- EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();
- #endif
- }
-
- if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset))
- {
- USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset);
-
- USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
- USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
-
- Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
- ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize,
- ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
- }
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER +#include "../USBInterrupt.h" + +void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void) +{ + USB.INTCTRLA = 0; + USB.INTCTRLB = 0; +} + +void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void) +{ + USB.INTFLAGSACLR = 0xFF; + USB.INTFLAGSBCLR = 0xFF; +} + +ISR(USB_BUSEVENT_vect) +{ + #if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI); + + EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(); + } + #endif + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend); + + #if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT) + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached; + EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(); + #else + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended; + EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(); + #endif + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume); + + if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber) + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured; + else + USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered; + + #if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT) + EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(); + #else + EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(); + #endif + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset); + + USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Default; + USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(); + } +} + diff --git a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h index b6acec4ea..c25c5c86e 100644 --- a/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h +++ b/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h @@ -1,166 +1,166 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
- * from the USB controller.
- *
- * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
- * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
- */
-
-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__
-#define __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Preprocessor Checks: */
- #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
- #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Enums: */
- enum USB_Interrupts_t
- {
- USB_INT_BUSEVENTI = 1,
- USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend = 2,
- USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume = 3,
- USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset = 4,
- USB_INT_SOFI = 5,
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
- USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_BUSEVIE_bm;
- return;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm;
- return;
- }
- }
-
- static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
- USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_BUSEVIE_bm;
- return;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;
- return;
- }
- }
-
- static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:
- USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SUSPENDIF_bm;
- return;
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:
- USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RESUMEIF_bm;
- return;
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:
- USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RSTIF_bm;
- return;
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SOFIF_bm;
- return;
- }
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
- return (USB.INTCTRLA & USB_BUSEVIE_bm);
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- return (USB.INTCTRLA & USB_SOFIE_bm);
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
- static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)
- {
- switch (Interrupt)
- {
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:
- return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SUSPENDIF_bm);
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:
- return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RESUMEIF_bm);
- case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:
- return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RSTIF_bm);
- case USB_INT_SOFI:
- return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SOFIF_bm);
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "../USBMode.h"
- #include "../Events.h"
- #include "../USBController.h"
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
- void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
- #endif
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts + * from the USB controller. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__ +#define __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Enums: */ + enum USB_Interrupts_t + { + USB_INT_BUSEVENTI = 1, + USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend = 2, + USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume = 3, + USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset = 4, + USB_INT_SOFI = 5, + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI: + USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_BUSEVIE_bm; + return; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm; + return; + } + } + + static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI: + USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_BUSEVIE_bm; + return; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm; + return; + } + } + + static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend: + USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SUSPENDIF_bm; + return; + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume: + USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RESUMEIF_bm; + return; + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset: + USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RSTIF_bm; + return; + case USB_INT_SOFI: + USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SOFIF_bm; + return; + } + } + + static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI: + return (USB.INTCTRLA & USB_BUSEVIE_bm); + case USB_INT_SOFI: + return (USB.INTCTRLA & USB_SOFIE_bm); + } + + return false; + } + + static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) + { + switch (Interrupt) + { + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend: + return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SUSPENDIF_bm); + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume: + return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RESUMEIF_bm); + case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset: + return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RSTIF_bm); + case USB_INT_SOFI: + return (USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SOFIF_bm); + } + + return false; + } + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../USBMode.h" + #include "../Events.h" + #include "../USBController.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void); + void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h index 125a8a9b5..bb5679ad9 100644 --- a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h +++ b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h @@ -1,324 +1,324 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
- * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks UC3 Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
- * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- * - None
- *
- * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description
- * Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
- * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
- *
- * Usage Example:
- * \code
- * #include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h>
- *
- * void main(void)
- * {
- * // Start the master external oscillator which will be used as the main clock reference
- * AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(0, EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE, EXOSC_START_0CLK);
- *
- * // Start the PLL for the CPU clock, switch CPU to it
- * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(0, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, F_CPU);
- * AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL0, F_CPU);
- *
- * // Start the PLL for the USB Generic Clock module
- * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(1, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, 48000000);
- * }
- * \endcode
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
-#define _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Enum for the possible external oscillator types. */
- enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t
- {
- EXOSC_MODE_CLOCK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_EXT_CLOCK, /**< External clock (non-crystal) mode. */
- EXOSC_MODE_900KHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G0, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 900KHz. */
- EXOSC_MODE_3MHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G1, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 3MHz. */
- EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G2, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 8MHz. */
- EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G3, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or faster than 8MHz. */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible external oscillator statup times. */
- enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t
- {
- EXOSC_START_0CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_0_RCOSC, /**< Immediate startup, no delay. */
- EXOSC_START_64CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_64_RCOSC, /**< Wait 64 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- EXOSC_START_128CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_128_RCOSC, /**< Wait 128 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- EXOSC_START_2048CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_2048_RCOSC, /**< Wait 2048 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- EXOSC_START_4096CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_4096_RCOSC, /**< Wait 4096 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- EXOSC_START_8192CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_8192_RCOSC, /**< Wait 8192 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- EXOSC_START_16384CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_16384_RCOSC, /**< Wait 16384 clock cyles before startup for stability. */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */
- enum UC3_System_ClockSource_t
- {
- CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the internal slow clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_OSC0 = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 0 clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_OSC1 = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 1 clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_PLL0 = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 0 clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_PLL1 = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 1 clock. */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Starts the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
- * the oscillator is ready for use.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the external oscillator to start.
- * \param[in] Type Type of clock attached to the given oscillator channel, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t.
- * \param[in] Startup Statup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Type,
- const uint8_t Startup)
- {
- switch (Channel)
- {
- case 0:
- AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.startup = Startup;
- AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.mode = Type;
- break;
- case 1:
- AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.startup = Startup;
- AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.mode = Type;
- break;
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- AVR32_PM.mcctrl |= (1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));
-
- while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_OSC0RDY_OFFSET + Channel))));
- return true;
- }
-
- /** Stops the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the external oscillator to stop.
- */
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel)
- {
- AVR32_PM.mcctrl &= ~(1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));
- }
-
- /** Starts the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.
- *
- * \note The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the PLL to start.
- * \param[in] Source Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
- * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.
- * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the PLL's output.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency)
- {
- if (SourceFreq > Frequency)
- return false;
-
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 0;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 1;
- break;
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllmul = (Frequency / SourceFreq) ? (((Frequency / SourceFreq) - 1) / 2) : 0;
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].plldiv = 0;
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = true;
-
- while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_LOCK0_OFFSET + Channel))));
- return true;
- }
-
- /** Stops the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the PLL to stop.
- */
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel)
- {
- AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = false;
- }
-
- /** Starts the given Generic Clock of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the Generic Clock to start.
- * \param[in] Source Clock source for the Generic Clock, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
- * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the Generic Clock's clock source, in Hz.
- * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the Generic Clock's output.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the Generic Clock was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,
- const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency)
- {
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_PLL1:
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;
- break;
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- if (SourceFreq < Frequency)
- return false;
-
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].diven = (SourceFreq > Frequency) ? true : false;
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].div = (((SourceFreq / Frequency) - 1) / 2);
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = true;
-
- return true;
- }
-
- /** Stops the given generic clock of the UC3 microcontroller.
- *
- * \param[in] Channel Index of the generic clock to stop.
- */
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel)
- {
- AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = false;
- }
-
- /** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured
- * and ready for use before this function is called.
- *
- * This function will configure the FLASH controller's wait states automatically to suit the given clock source.
- *
- * \param[in] Source Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
- * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was sucessfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq)
- {
- AVR32_FLASHC.FCR.fws = (SourceFreq > 30000000) ? true : false;
-
- switch (Source)
- {
- #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW)
- case CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK:
- AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0)
- case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
- AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0;
- break;
- #endif
- #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0)
- case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:
- AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0;
- break;
- #endif
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- return true;
- }
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration + * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers + * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks UC3 Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h + * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies + * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module: + * - None + * + * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description + * Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration + * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * #include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h> + * + * void main(void) + * { + * // Start the master external oscillator which will be used as the main clock reference + * AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(0, EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE, EXOSC_START_0CLK); + * + * // Start the PLL for the CPU clock, switch CPU to it + * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(0, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, F_CPU); + * AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL0, F_CPU); + * + * // Start the PLL for the USB Generic Clock module + * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(1, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, 48000000); + * } + * \endcode + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_ +#define _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Enum for the possible external oscillator types. */ + enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t + { + EXOSC_MODE_CLOCK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_EXT_CLOCK, /**< External clock (non-crystal) mode. */ + EXOSC_MODE_900KHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G0, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 900KHz. */ + EXOSC_MODE_3MHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G1, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 3MHz. */ + EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_MAX = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G2, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 8MHz. */ + EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G3, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or faster than 8MHz. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible external oscillator statup times. */ + enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t + { + EXOSC_START_0CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_0_RCOSC, /**< Immediate startup, no delay. */ + EXOSC_START_64CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_64_RCOSC, /**< Wait 64 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + EXOSC_START_128CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_128_RCOSC, /**< Wait 128 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + EXOSC_START_2048CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_2048_RCOSC, /**< Wait 2048 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + EXOSC_START_4096CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_4096_RCOSC, /**< Wait 4096 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + EXOSC_START_8192CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_8192_RCOSC, /**< Wait 8192 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + EXOSC_START_16384CLK = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_16384_RCOSC, /**< Wait 16384 clock cyles before startup for stability. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */ + enum UC3_System_ClockSource_t + { + CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the internal slow clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_OSC0 = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 0 clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_OSC1 = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 1 clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_PLL0 = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 0 clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_PLL1 = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 1 clock. */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Starts the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until + * the oscillator is ready for use. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the external oscillator to start. + * \param[in] Type Type of clock attached to the given oscillator channel, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t. + * \param[in] Startup Statup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t Startup) + { + switch (Channel) + { + case 0: + AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.startup = Startup; + AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.mode = Type; + break; + case 1: + AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.startup = Startup; + AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.mode = Type; + break; + default: + return false; + } + + AVR32_PM.mcctrl |= (1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel)); + + while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_OSC0RDY_OFFSET + Channel)))); + return true; + } + + /** Stops the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the external oscillator to stop. + */ + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel) + { + AVR32_PM.mcctrl &= ~(1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel)); + } + + /** Starts the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use. + * + * \note The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the PLL to start. + * \param[in] Source Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t. + * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz. + * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the PLL's output. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) + { + if (SourceFreq > Frequency) + return false; + + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0: + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 0; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1: + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 1; + break; + default: + return false; + } + + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllmul = (Frequency / SourceFreq) ? (((Frequency / SourceFreq) - 1) / 2) : 0; + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].plldiv = 0; + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = true; + + while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_LOCK0_OFFSET + Channel)))); + return true; + } + + /** Stops the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the PLL to stop. + */ + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel) + { + AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = false; + } + + /** Starts the given Generic Clock of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the Generic Clock to start. + * \param[in] Source Clock source for the Generic Clock, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t. + * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the Generic Clock's clock source, in Hz. + * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the Generic Clock's output. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the Generic Clock was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel, + const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) + { + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0: + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false; + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1: + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false; + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0: + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true; + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_PLL1: + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true; + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1; + break; + default: + return false; + } + + if (SourceFreq < Frequency) + return false; + + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].diven = (SourceFreq > Frequency) ? true : false; + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].div = (((SourceFreq / Frequency) - 1) / 2); + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = true; + + return true; + } + + /** Stops the given generic clock of the UC3 microcontroller. + * + * \param[in] Channel Index of the generic clock to stop. + */ + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel) + { + AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = false; + } + + /** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured + * and ready for use before this function is called. + * + * This function will configure the FLASH controller's wait states automatically to suit the given clock source. + * + * \param[in] Source Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t. + * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was sucessfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq) + { + AVR32_FLASHC.FCR.fws = (SourceFreq > 30000000) ? true : false; + + switch (Source) + { + #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW) + case CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK: + AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW; + break; + #endif + #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0) + case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0: + AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0; + break; + #endif + #if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0) + case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0: + AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0; + break; + #endif + default: + return false; + } + + return true; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S index 9509fd7f2..ddfe00984 100644 --- a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S +++ b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S @@ -1,125 +1,125 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#include <avr32/io.h>
-
-.section .exception_handlers, "ax", @progbits
-
-// ================= EXCEPTION TABLE ================
-.balign 0x200
-.global EVBA_Table
-EVBA_Table:
-
-.org 0x000
-Exception_Unrecoverable_Exception:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x004
-Exception_TLB_Multiple_Hit:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x008
-Exception_Bus_Error_Data_Fetch:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x00C
-Exception_Bus_Error_Instruction_Fetch:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x010
-Exception_NMI:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x014
-Exception_Instruction_Address:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x018
-Exception_ITLB_Protection:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x01C
-Exception_OCD_Breakpoint:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x020
-Exception_Illegal_Opcode:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x024
-Exception_Unimplemented_Instruction:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x028
-Exception_Privilege_Violation:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x02C
-Exception_Floating_Point:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x030
-Exception_Coprocessor_Absent:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x034
-Exception_Data_Address_Read:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x038
-Exception_Data_Address_Write:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x03C
-Exception_DTLB_Protection_Read:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x040
-Exception_DTLB_Protection_Write:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x044
-Exception_DTLB_Modified:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x050
-Exception_ITLB_Miss:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x060
-Exception_DTLB_Miss_Read:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x070
-Exception_DTLB_Miss_Write:
- rjmp $
-.org 0x100
-Exception_Supervisor_Call:
- rjmp $
-// ============== END OF EXCEPTION TABLE =============
-
-// ============= GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ===========
-.balign 4
-.irp Level, 0, 1, 2, 3
-Exception_INT\Level:
- mov r12, \Level
- call INTC_GetInterruptHandler
- mov pc, r12
-.endr
-// ========= END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ========
-
-// ====== GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ======
-.balign 4
-.global Autovector_Table
-Autovector_Table:
-.irp Level, 0, 1, 2, 3
- .word ((AVR32_INTC_INT0 + \Level) << AVR32_INTC_IPR_INTLEVEL_OFFSET) | (Exception_INT\Level - EVBA_Table)
-.endr
-// === END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ===
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include <avr32/io.h> + +.section .exception_handlers, "ax", @progbits + +// ================= EXCEPTION TABLE ================ +.balign 0x200 +.global EVBA_Table +EVBA_Table: + +.org 0x000 +Exception_Unrecoverable_Exception: + rjmp $ +.org 0x004 +Exception_TLB_Multiple_Hit: + rjmp $ +.org 0x008 +Exception_Bus_Error_Data_Fetch: + rjmp $ +.org 0x00C +Exception_Bus_Error_Instruction_Fetch: + rjmp $ +.org 0x010 +Exception_NMI: + rjmp $ +.org 0x014 +Exception_Instruction_Address: + rjmp $ +.org 0x018 +Exception_ITLB_Protection: + rjmp $ +.org 0x01C +Exception_OCD_Breakpoint: + rjmp $ +.org 0x020 +Exception_Illegal_Opcode: + rjmp $ +.org 0x024 +Exception_Unimplemented_Instruction: + rjmp $ +.org 0x028 +Exception_Privilege_Violation: + rjmp $ +.org 0x02C +Exception_Floating_Point: + rjmp $ +.org 0x030 +Exception_Coprocessor_Absent: + rjmp $ +.org 0x034 +Exception_Data_Address_Read: + rjmp $ +.org 0x038 +Exception_Data_Address_Write: + rjmp $ +.org 0x03C +Exception_DTLB_Protection_Read: + rjmp $ +.org 0x040 +Exception_DTLB_Protection_Write: + rjmp $ +.org 0x044 +Exception_DTLB_Modified: + rjmp $ +.org 0x050 +Exception_ITLB_Miss: + rjmp $ +.org 0x060 +Exception_DTLB_Miss_Read: + rjmp $ +.org 0x070 +Exception_DTLB_Miss_Write: + rjmp $ +.org 0x100 +Exception_Supervisor_Call: + rjmp $ +// ============== END OF EXCEPTION TABLE ============= + +// ============= GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER =========== +.balign 4 +.irp Level, 0, 1, 2, 3 +Exception_INT\Level: + mov r12, \Level + call INTC_GetInterruptHandler + mov pc, r12 +.endr +// ========= END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ======== + +// ====== GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ====== +.balign 4 +.global Autovector_Table +Autovector_Table: +.irp Level, 0, 1, 2, 3 + .word ((AVR32_INTC_INT0 + \Level) << AVR32_INTC_IPR_INTLEVEL_OFFSET) | (Exception_INT\Level - EVBA_Table) +.endr +// === END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE === diff --git a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c index 2e260b38b..98d1e45f5 100644 --- a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c +++ b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c @@ -1,62 +1,62 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#include "InterruptManagement.h"
-
-/** Interrupt vector table, containing the ISR to call for each interrupt group */
-InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];
-
-/** ISR for unhandled interrupt groups */
-ISR(Unhandled_Interrupt)
-{
- for (;;);
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the associated interrupt handler for the interrupt group currently being fired. This
- * is called directly from the exception handler routine before dispatching to the ISR.
- */
-InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel)
-{
- return InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC.icr[AVR32_INTC_INT3 - InterruptLevel]];
-}
-
-/** Initializes the interrupt controller ready to handle interrupts. This must be called at the
- * start of the user program before any interrupts are registered or enabled.
- */
-void INTC_Init(void)
-{
- for (uint8_t InterruptGroup = 0; InterruptGroup < AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS; InterruptGroup++)
- {
- InterruptHandlers[InterruptGroup] = Unhandled_Interrupt;
- AVR32_INTC.ipr[InterruptGroup] = Autovector_Table[AVR32_INTC_INT0];
- }
-
- __builtin_mtsr(AVR32_EVBA, (uintptr_t)&EVBA_Table);
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "InterruptManagement.h" + +/** Interrupt vector table, containing the ISR to call for each interrupt group */ +InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS]; + +/** ISR for unhandled interrupt groups */ +ISR(Unhandled_Interrupt) +{ + for (;;); +} + +/** Retrieves the associated interrupt handler for the interrupt group currently being fired. This + * is called directly from the exception handler routine before dispatching to the ISR. + */ +InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel) +{ + return InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC.icr[AVR32_INTC_INT3 - InterruptLevel]]; +} + +/** Initializes the interrupt controller ready to handle interrupts. This must be called at the + * start of the user program before any interrupts are registered or enabled. + */ +void INTC_Init(void) +{ + for (uint8_t InterruptGroup = 0; InterruptGroup < AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS; InterruptGroup++) + { + InterruptHandlers[InterruptGroup] = Unhandled_Interrupt; + AVR32_INTC.ipr[InterruptGroup] = Autovector_Table[AVR32_INTC_INT0]; + } + + __builtin_mtsr(AVR32_EVBA, (uintptr_t)&EVBA_Table); +} diff --git a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h index 67dc3ea1d..dd70675c3 100644 --- a/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h +++ b/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt
- * handlers within the device.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts UC3 Interrupt Controller Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
- * \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
- *
- * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- * - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
- * - LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S
- *
- * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description
- * Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt
- * handlers within the device.
- *
- * Usage Example:
- * \code
- * #include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h>
- *
- * ISR(USB_Group_IRQ_Handler)
- * {
- * // USB group handler code here
- * }
- *
- * void main(void)
- * {
- * INTC_Init();
- * INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(INTC_IRQ_GROUP(AVR32_USBB_IRQ), AVR32_INTC_INT0, USB_Group_IRQ_Handler);
- * }
- * \endcode
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_
-#define _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
- #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
- /* Type Defines: */
- typedef void (*InterruptHandlerPtr_t)(void);
-
- /* External Variables: */
- extern const void EVBA_Table;
- extern const uint32_t Autovector_Table[];
- extern InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Converts a given interrupt index into its assocated interrupt group.
- *
- * \param[in] IRQIndex Index of the interrupt request to convert.
- *
- * \return Interrupt group number associated with the interrupt index.
- */
- #define INTC_IRQ_GROUP(IRQIndex) (IRQIndex / 32)
-
- /** Converts a given interrupt index into its assocated interrupt line.
- *
- * \param[in] IRQIndex Index of the interrupt request to convert.
- *
- * \return Interrupt line number associated with the interrupt index.
- */
- #define INTC_IRQ_LINE(IRQIndex) (IRQIndex % 32)
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- /** Initializes the interrupt controller, nulling out all interrupt handlers ready for new registration. This
- * function should be called once on startup to ensure the interrupt controller is ready for use.
- */
- void INTC_Init(void);
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Registers a handler for a given interrupt group. On the AVR32 UC3 devices, interrupts are grouped by
- * peripheral. To save on SRAM used, a single ISR handles all interrupt lines within a single group - to
- * determine the exact line that has interrupted within the group ISR handler, use \ref INTC_GetGroupInterrupts().
- *
- * If multiple interrupts with the same group are registered, the last registered handler will become the
- * handler called for interrupts raised within that group.
- *
- * To obtain the group number of a specific interrupt index, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.
- *
- * \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to register a handler for.
- * \param[in] InterruptLevel Priority level for the specified interrupt, a \c AVR32_INTC_INT* mask.
- * \param[in] Handler Address of the ISR handler for the interrupt group.
- */
- static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,
- const uint8_t InterruptLevel,
- const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,
- const uint8_t InterruptLevel,
- const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler)
- {
- InterruptHandlers[GroupNumber] = Handler;
- AVR32_INTC.ipr[GroupNumber] = Autovector_Table[InterruptLevel];
- }
-
- /** Retrieves the pending interrupts for a given interrupt group. The result of this function should be masked
- * against interrupt request indexes converted to a request line number via the \ref INTC_IRQ_LINE() macro. To
- * obtain the group number of a given interrupt request, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.
- *
- * \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to check.
- *
- * \return Mask of pending interrupt lines for the given interrupt group.
- */
- static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber)
- {
- return AVR32_INTC.irr[GroupNumber];
- }
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt + * handlers within the device. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers + * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts UC3 Interrupt Controller Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h + * \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. + * + * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies + * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module: + * - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c + * - LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S + * + * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description + * Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt + * handlers within the device. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * #include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h> + * + * ISR(USB_Group_IRQ_Handler) + * { + * // USB group handler code here + * } + * + * void main(void) + * { + * INTC_Init(); + * INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(INTC_IRQ_GROUP(AVR32_USBB_IRQ), AVR32_INTC_INT0, USB_Group_IRQ_Handler); + * } + * \endcode + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_ +#define _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef void (*InterruptHandlerPtr_t)(void); + + /* External Variables: */ + extern const void EVBA_Table; + extern const uint32_t Autovector_Table[]; + extern InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS]; + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Converts a given interrupt index into its assocated interrupt group. + * + * \param[in] IRQIndex Index of the interrupt request to convert. + * + * \return Interrupt group number associated with the interrupt index. + */ + #define INTC_IRQ_GROUP(IRQIndex) (IRQIndex / 32) + + /** Converts a given interrupt index into its assocated interrupt line. + * + * \param[in] IRQIndex Index of the interrupt request to convert. + * + * \return Interrupt line number associated with the interrupt index. + */ + #define INTC_IRQ_LINE(IRQIndex) (IRQIndex % 32) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Initializes the interrupt controller, nulling out all interrupt handlers ready for new registration. This + * function should be called once on startup to ensure the interrupt controller is ready for use. + */ + void INTC_Init(void); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Registers a handler for a given interrupt group. On the AVR32 UC3 devices, interrupts are grouped by + * peripheral. To save on SRAM used, a single ISR handles all interrupt lines within a single group - to + * determine the exact line that has interrupted within the group ISR handler, use \ref INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(). + * + * If multiple interrupts with the same group are registered, the last registered handler will become the + * handler called for interrupts raised within that group. + * + * To obtain the group number of a specific interrupt index, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro. + * + * \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to register a handler for. + * \param[in] InterruptLevel Priority level for the specified interrupt, a \c AVR32_INTC_INT* mask. + * \param[in] Handler Address of the ISR handler for the interrupt group. + */ + static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber, + const uint8_t InterruptLevel, + const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber, + const uint8_t InterruptLevel, + const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler) + { + InterruptHandlers[GroupNumber] = Handler; + AVR32_INTC.ipr[GroupNumber] = Autovector_Table[InterruptLevel]; + } + + /** Retrieves the pending interrupts for a given interrupt group. The result of this function should be masked + * against interrupt request indexes converted to a request line number via the \ref INTC_IRQ_LINE() macro. To + * obtain the group number of a given interrupt request, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro. + * + * \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to check. + * + * \return Mask of pending interrupt lines for the given interrupt group. + */ + static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber) + { + return AVR32_INTC.irr[GroupNumber]; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h b/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h index 9e6a0f4b1..62e9284d3 100644 --- a/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h +++ b/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h @@ -1,298 +1,298 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
- * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
- */
-
-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
- * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks AVR USB XMEGA Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
- * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.
- *
- * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
- * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
- * - None
- *
- * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description
- * Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
- * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
- *
- * Usage Example:
- * \code
- * #include <LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h>
- *
- * void main(void)
- * {
- * // Start the internal 32MHz RC oscillator and switch the CPU core to run from it
- * AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
- * XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, F_CPU);
- *
- * // Start the external oscillator and multiply up the frequency
- * AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX, EXOSC_START_1KCLK);
- * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_XOSC, 8000000, F_USB);
- * }
- * \endcode
- *
- * @{
- */
-
-#ifndef _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
-#define _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
-
- /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- extern "C" {
- #endif
-
- /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
- /* Macros: */
- /** Enum for the possible external oscillator frequency ranges. */
- enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t
- {
- EXOSC_FREQ_2MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_04TO2_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 2MHz. */
- EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_2TO9_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 9MHz. */
- EXOSC_FREQ_12MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_9TO12_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 12MHz. */
- EXOSC_FREQ_16MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_12TO16_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 16MHz. */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible external oscillator statup times. */
- enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t
- {
- EXOSC_START_6CLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_EXTCLK_gc, /**< Wait 6 clock cycles before startup (external clock). */
- EXOSC_START_32KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_32KHz_gc, /**< Wait 32K clock cycles before startup (32.768KHz crystal). */
- EXOSC_START_256CLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_256CLK_gc, /**< Wait 256 clock cycles before startup. */
- EXOSC_START_1KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_1KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 1K clock cycles before startup. */
- EXOSC_START_16KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_16KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 16K clock cycles before startup. */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */
- enum XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t
- {
- CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 2MHz RC Oscillator clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32MHz RC Oscillator clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_XOSC = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the External Oscillator clock. */
- CLOCK_SRC_PLL = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal PLL clock. */
- };
-
- /* Inline Functions: */
- /** Starts the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
- * the oscillator is ready for use.
- *
- * \param[in] FreqRange Frequency range of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t.
- * \param[in] Startup Statup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,
- const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,
- const uint8_t Startup)
- {
- OSC.XOSCCTRL = (FreqRange | ((Startup == EXOSC_START_32KCLK) ? OSC_X32KLPM_bm : 0) | Startup);
- OSC.CTRL |= OSC_XOSCEN_bm;
-
- while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_XOSCRDY_bm));
- return true;
- }
-
- /** Stops the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller. */
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(void)
- {
- OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_XOSCEN_bm;
- }
-
- /** Starts the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
- * the oscillator is ready for use.
- *
- * \param[in] Source Internal oscillator to start, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline uint8_t AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline uint8_t AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)
- {
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
- OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC2MEN_bm;
- while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC2MRDY_bm));
- return true;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
- OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32MEN_bm;
- while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32MRDY_bm));
- return true;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
- OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32KEN_bm;
- while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32KRDY_bm));
- return true;
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /** Stops the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller.
- *
- * \param[in] Source Internal oscillator to stop, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)
- {
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
- OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC2MEN_bm;
- return true;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
- OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32MEN_bm;
- return true;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
- OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32KEN_bm;
- return true;
- }
-
- return false;
- }
-
- /** Starts the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.
- *
- * \note The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.
- *
- * \param[in] Source Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
- * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.
- * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the PLL's output.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq,
- const uint32_t Frequency)
- {
- uint8_t MulFactor = (Frequency / SourceFreq);
-
- if (SourceFreq > Frequency)
- return false;
-
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
- OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC2M_gc | MulFactor);
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
- OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC32M_gc | MulFactor);
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:
- OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_XOSC_gc | MulFactor);
- break;
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- OSC.CTRL |= OSC_PLLEN_bm;
-
- while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_PLLRDY_bm));
- return true;
- }
-
- /** Stops the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller. */
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(void)
- {
- OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_PLLEN_bm;
- }
-
- /** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured
- * and ready for use before this function is called.
- *
- * \param[in] Source Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
- * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz.
- *
- * \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was sucessfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
- */
- static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
- static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
- const uint32_t SourceFreq)
- {
- uint8_t ClockSourceMask = 0;
-
- switch (Source)
- {
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
- ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC2M_gc;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
- ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32M_gc;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
- ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32K_gc;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:
- ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_XOSC_gc;
- break;
- case CLOCK_SRC_PLL:
- ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_PLL_gc;
- break;
- default:
- return false;
- }
-
- uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
- GlobalInterruptDisable();
-
- CCP = CCP_IOREG_gc;
- CLK.CTRL = ClockSourceMask;
-
- SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
-
- Delay_MS(1);
- return (CLK.CTRL == ClockSourceMask);
- }
-
- /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
- #if defined(__cplusplus)
- }
- #endif
-
-#endif
-
-/** @} */
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration + * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals. + */ + +/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers + * \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks AVR USB XMEGA Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h + * \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. + * + * \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies + * The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module: + * - None + * + * \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description + * Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration + * of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * #include <LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h> + * + * void main(void) + * { + * // Start the internal 32MHz RC oscillator and switch the CPU core to run from it + * AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ); + * XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, F_CPU); + * + * // Start the external oscillator and multiply up the frequency + * AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX, EXOSC_START_1KCLK); + * AVR32CLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_XOSC, 8000000, F_USB); + * } + * \endcode + * + * @{ + */ + +#ifndef _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_ +#define _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Enum for the possible external oscillator frequency ranges. */ + enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t + { + EXOSC_FREQ_2MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_04TO2_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 2MHz. */ + EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_2TO9_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 9MHz. */ + EXOSC_FREQ_12MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_9TO12_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 12MHz. */ + EXOSC_FREQ_16MHZ_MAX = OSC_FRQRANGE_12TO16_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 16MHz. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible external oscillator statup times. */ + enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t + { + EXOSC_START_6CLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_EXTCLK_gc, /**< Wait 6 clock cycles before startup (external clock). */ + EXOSC_START_32KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_32KHz_gc, /**< Wait 32K clock cycles before startup (32.768KHz crystal). */ + EXOSC_START_256CLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_256CLK_gc, /**< Wait 256 clock cycles before startup. */ + EXOSC_START_1KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_1KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 1K clock cycles before startup. */ + EXOSC_START_16KCLK = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_16KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 16K clock cycles before startup. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */ + enum XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t + { + CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 2MHz RC Oscillator clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32MHz RC Oscillator clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_XOSC = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the External Oscillator clock. */ + CLOCK_SRC_PLL = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal PLL clock. */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Starts the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until + * the oscillator is ready for use. + * + * \param[in] FreqRange Frequency range of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t. + * \param[in] Startup Statup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange, + const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange, + const uint8_t Startup) + { + OSC.XOSCCTRL = (FreqRange | ((Startup == EXOSC_START_32KCLK) ? OSC_X32KLPM_bm : 0) | Startup); + OSC.CTRL |= OSC_XOSCEN_bm; + + while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_XOSCRDY_bm)); + return true; + } + + /** Stops the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller. */ + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(void) + { + OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_XOSCEN_bm; + } + + /** Starts the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until + * the oscillator is ready for use. + * + * \param[in] Source Internal oscillator to start, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline uint8_t AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline uint8_t AVR32CLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) + { + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ: + OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC2MEN_bm; + while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC2MRDY_bm)); + return true; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ: + OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32MEN_bm; + while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32MRDY_bm)); + return true; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ: + OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32KEN_bm; + while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32KRDY_bm)); + return true; + } + + return false; + } + + /** Stops the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller. + * + * \param[in] Source Internal oscillator to stop, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) + { + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ: + OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC2MEN_bm; + return true; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ: + OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32MEN_bm; + return true; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ: + OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32KEN_bm; + return true; + } + + return false; + } + + /** Starts the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use. + * + * \note The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency. + * + * \param[in] Source Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t. + * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz. + * \param[in] Frequency Target frequency of the PLL's output. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq, + const uint32_t Frequency) + { + uint8_t MulFactor = (Frequency / SourceFreq); + + if (SourceFreq > Frequency) + return false; + + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ: + OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC2M_gc | MulFactor); + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ: + OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC32M_gc | MulFactor); + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC: + OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_XOSC_gc | MulFactor); + break; + default: + return false; + } + + OSC.CTRL |= OSC_PLLEN_bm; + + while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_PLLRDY_bm)); + return true; + } + + /** Stops the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller. */ + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(void) + { + OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_PLLEN_bm; + } + + /** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured + * and ready for use before this function is called. + * + * \param[in] Source Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t. + * \param[in] SourceFreq Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was sucessfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified. + */ + static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE; + static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source, + const uint32_t SourceFreq) + { + uint8_t ClockSourceMask = 0; + + switch (Source) + { + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ: + ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC2M_gc; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ: + ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32M_gc; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ: + ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32K_gc; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC: + ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_XOSC_gc; + break; + case CLOCK_SRC_PLL: + ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_PLL_gc; + break; + default: + return false; + } + + uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask(); + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + + CCP = CCP_IOREG_gc; + CLK.CTRL = ClockSourceMask; + + SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt); + + Delay_MS(1); + return (CLK.CTRL == ClockSourceMask); + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif + +/** @} */ diff --git a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Doxygen.conf index 3e0874ec1..ab94f93ef 100644 --- a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Doxygen.conf +++ b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Doxygen.conf @@ -1,1565 +1,1565 @@ -# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME = "HID Device Report Viewer Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
- "The $name widget" \
- "The $name file" \
- is \
- provides \
- specifies \
- contains \
- represents \
- a \
- an \
- the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
- *.c \
- *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \
- INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \
- PROGMEM
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED =
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "HID Device Report Viewer Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, +# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English +# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, +# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, +# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses. +# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension. +# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag. +# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of +# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP, +# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat +# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran), +# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation +# rather than with sharp brackets. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. +# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. +# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. +# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. +# The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. +# Otherwise they will link to the documentation. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting +# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add. +# For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's +# filter section matches. +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help +# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents +# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML +# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of +# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as +# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have +# this name. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser). +# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list. + +USE_INLINE_TREES = NO + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript +# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should +# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine +# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index +# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup +# and does not have live searching capabilities. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for +# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the +# Makefile that is written to the output directory. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. +# This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. +# On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c index c7a73e761..f3126c080 100644 --- a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c +++ b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c @@ -1,320 +1,320 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Main source file for the HIDReportViewer project. This file contains the main tasks of
- * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "HIDReportViewer.h"
-
-/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
-static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
-
-/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- * within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Device_HID_Interface =
- {
- .Config =
- {
- .DataINPipeNumber = 1,
- .DataINPipeDoubleBank = false,
-
- .DataOUTPipeNumber = 2,
- .DataOUTPipeDoubleBank = false,
-
- .HIDInterfaceProtocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
-
- .HIDParserData = &HIDReportInfo
- },
- };
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- SetupHardware();
-
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "HID Device Report Viewer Running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- sei();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- RetrieveDeviceData();
-
- HID_Host_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface);
- USB_USBTask();
- }
-}
-
-/** Task to retrieve the HID device information from an attached device, and output
- * the relevant data to the serial port for analysis.
- */
-void RetrieveDeviceData(void)
-{
- if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host)
- return;
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
-
- OutputReportSizes();
- OutputParsedReportItems();
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
- USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
-}
-
-/** Prints a summary of the device's HID report sizes from the HID parser output to the serial port
- * for display to the user.
- */
-void OutputReportSizes(void)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nTotal Device Reports: %" PRId8 "\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
-
- for (uint8_t ReportIndex = 0; ReportIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; ReportIndex++)
- {
- const HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[ReportIndex];
-
- uint8_t ReportSizeInBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_In];
- uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out];
- uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature];
-
- /* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
- printf_P(PSTR(" + Report ID 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Input Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
- " - Output Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
- " - Feature Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"),
- CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
- ReportSizeInBits,
- ((ReportSizeInBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits & 0x07) != 0)),
- ReportSizeOutBits,
- ((ReportSizeOutBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits & 0x07) != 0)),
- ReportSizeFeatureBits,
- ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
- }
-}
-
-/** Prints a summary of the device's parsed and stored report items along with their attributes
- * to the serial port for display to the user.
- */
-void OutputParsedReportItems(void)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("\r\nReport Items (%" PRId8 " in Table):\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems);
-
- for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++)
- {
- const HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex];
-
- printf_P(PSTR(" + Item %" PRId8 ":\r\n"
- " - Report ID: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Data Direction: %s\r\n"
- " - Item Flags: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Item Offset (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Item Size (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Usage Page: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
- " - Usage: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
- " - Unit Type: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
- " - Unit Exponent: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Logical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
- " - Logical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
- " - Physical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
- " - Physical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
- " - Collection Path:\r\n"),
- ItemIndex,
- RItem->ReportID,
- ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In) ? "IN" : ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out) ? "OUT" : "FEATURE")),
- RItem->ItemFlags,
- RItem->BitOffset,
- RItem->Attributes.BitSize,
- RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page,
- RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage,
- RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type,
- RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent,
- RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum,
- RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum,
- RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum,
- RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum);
-
- OutputCollectionPath(RItem->CollectionPath);
- }
-}
-
-/** Prints the HID Collection path (along with each node's attributes) to the serial port
- * for display to the user, from the given starting node to the root node.
- *
- * \param[in] CollectionPath Starting HID Collection node to print
- */
-void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath)
-{
- const HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrentNode = CollectionPath;
-
- while (CurrentNode != NULL)
- {
- printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n"
- " - Type: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
- " - Usage: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"),
- CurrentNode->Type, CurrentNode->Usage);
-
- CurrentNode = CurrentNode->Parent;
- }
-
- printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n"
- " END\r\n"));
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Disable clock division */
- clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
- /* Hardware Initialization */
- Serial_Init(9600, false);
- LEDs_Init();
- USB_Init();
-
- /* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
- Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
- puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- * stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
- puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
- uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
- uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512];
-
- if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
- sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
- {
- puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- return;
- }
-
- if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Device_HID_Interface,
- ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
- {
- puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid HID Device.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- return;
- }
-
- if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
- {
- puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- return;
- }
-
- if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Device_HID_Interface) != 0)
- {
- puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
- return;
- }
-
- puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
- USB_Disable();
-
- printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
- " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- * enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
- const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
- " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
- " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
- " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
- * an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
- * we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
- * have occupied).
- *
- * \param[in] CurrentItem Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded
- */
-bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
-{
- return true;
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the HIDReportViewer project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "HIDReportViewer.h" + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + +/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Device_HID_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .DataINPipeNumber = 1, + .DataINPipeDoubleBank = false, + + .DataOUTPipeNumber = 2, + .DataOUTPipeDoubleBank = false, + + .HIDInterfaceProtocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + + .HIDParserData = &HIDReportInfo + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "HID Device Report Viewer Running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + sei(); + + for (;;) + { + RetrieveDeviceData(); + + HID_Host_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Task to retrieve the HID device information from an attached device, and output + * the relevant data to the serial port for analysis. + */ +void RetrieveDeviceData(void) +{ + if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host) + return; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + OutputReportSizes(); + OutputParsedReportItems(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); +} + +/** Prints a summary of the device's HID report sizes from the HID parser output to the serial port + * for display to the user. + */ +void OutputReportSizes(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nTotal Device Reports: %" PRId8 "\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports); + + for (uint8_t ReportIndex = 0; ReportIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; ReportIndex++) + { + const HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[ReportIndex]; + + uint8_t ReportSizeInBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_In]; + uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out]; + uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature]; + + /* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */ + printf_P(PSTR(" + Report ID 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Input Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n" + " - Output Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n" + " - Feature Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"), + CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID, + ReportSizeInBits, + ((ReportSizeInBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits & 0x07) != 0)), + ReportSizeOutBits, + ((ReportSizeOutBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits & 0x07) != 0)), + ReportSizeFeatureBits, + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0))); + } +} + +/** Prints a summary of the device's parsed and stored report items along with their attributes + * to the serial port for display to the user. + */ +void OutputParsedReportItems(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("\r\nReport Items (%" PRId8 " in Table):\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems); + + for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++) + { + const HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex]; + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Item %" PRId8 ":\r\n" + " - Report ID: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Data Direction: %s\r\n" + " - Item Flags: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Item Offset (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Item Size (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Usage Page: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n" + " - Usage: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n" + " - Unit Type: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Unit Exponent: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Logical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Logical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Physical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Physical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Collection Path:\r\n"), + ItemIndex, + RItem->ReportID, + ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In) ? "IN" : ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out) ? "OUT" : "FEATURE")), + RItem->ItemFlags, + RItem->BitOffset, + RItem->Attributes.BitSize, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum); + + OutputCollectionPath(RItem->CollectionPath); + } +} + +/** Prints the HID Collection path (along with each node's attributes) to the serial port + * for display to the user, from the given starting node to the root node. + * + * \param[in] CollectionPath Starting HID Collection node to print + */ +void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath) +{ + const HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrentNode = CollectionPath; + + while (CurrentNode != NULL) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n" + " - Type: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Usage: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"), + CurrentNode->Type, CurrentNode->Usage); + + CurrentNode = CurrentNode->Parent; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n" + " END\r\n")); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Serial_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */ + Serial_CreateStream(NULL); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512]; + + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData, + sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Device_HID_Interface, + ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid HID Device.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Device_HID_Interface) != 0) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); + return; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_Disable(); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store + * an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items + * we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would + * have occupied). + * + * \param[in] CurrentItem Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with + * + * \return Boolean true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, false if it should be discarded + */ +bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem) +{ + return true; +} + diff --git a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h index ea8b6b938..af9f01388 100644 --- a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h +++ b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h @@ -1,87 +1,87 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for HIDReportViewer.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
-#define _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/wdt.h>
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
- #include <avr/power.h>
- #include <avr/interrupt.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <inttypes.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Version.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void SetupHardware(void);
- void RetrieveDeviceData(void);
- void OutputReportSizes(void);
- void OutputParsedReportItems(void);
- void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath);
-
- void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
- const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
-
- bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReportViewer.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdio.h> + #include <inttypes.h> + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void RetrieveDeviceData(void); + void OutputReportSizes(void); + void OutputParsedReportItems(void); + void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath); + + void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem); + +#endif + diff --git a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt index 40a2f9886..32a87218d 100644 --- a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt +++ b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt @@ -1,64 +1,64 @@ -/** \file
- *
- * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage HID Device Report Viewer Programmer Project
- *
- * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
- *
- * \section Sec_Info USB Information:
- *
- * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- * <td>Host</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- * <td>N/A</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- * <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
- * USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- * <td>Low Speed Mode \n
- * Full Speed Mode</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- * \section Sec_Description Project Description:
- *
- * Firmware for a HID Report viewer. This project is designed to aid in the debugging of USB HID Hosts, where the contents of an
- * unknown HID device's HID Report need to be examined. Once a HID device has been plugged into this application, the HID report
- * descriptor will be parsed using the internal LUFA HID report parser, and the results dumped to the serial port in a human
- * readable format. This output will contain information on the sizes of the reports within the device's HID interface, as well as
- * information on each report element (size, usage, minimum/maximum values, etc.).
- *
- * \section Sec_Options Project Options
- *
- * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td>
- * None
- * </td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- */
-
+/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage HID Device Report Viewer Programmer Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Host</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Specification \n + * USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a HID Report viewer. This project is designed to aid in the debugging of USB HID Hosts, where the contents of an + * unknown HID device's HID Report need to be examined. Once a HID device has been plugged into this application, the HID report + * descriptor will be parsed using the internal LUFA HID report parser, and the results dumped to the serial port in a human + * readable format. This output will contain information on the sizes of the reports within the device's HID interface, as well as + * information on each report element (size, usage, minimum/maximum values, etc.). + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile index ab8387d9c..ce02338ea 100644 --- a/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile +++ b/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile @@ -1,722 +1,722 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).
-ARCH = AVR8
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by
-# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-# software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_USB = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = HIDReportViewer
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens
-LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=c99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \
-debug gdb-config checksource
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation). +ARCH = AVR8 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by +# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value +# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to +# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate +# software delays. +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_USB = $(F_CPU) + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = HIDReportViewer + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../.. + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens +LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_HOST_ONLY +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL) + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=c99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ +debug gdb-config checksource diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c index ba50261bf..0c7e63446 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c @@ -1,329 +1,329 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
- * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
- * the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "Descriptors.h"
-
-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
- * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
- * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
- * process begins.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
-
- .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
- .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
- .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
- .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
-
- .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
-
- .VendorID = 0x03EB,
- .ProductID = 0x2048,
- .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01),
-
- .ManufacturerStrIndex = 0x01,
- .ProductStrIndex = 0x02,
- .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
- .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
-};
-
-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
- * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
- * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
- * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
-{
- .Config =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
-
- .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
- .TotalInterfaces = 2,
-
- .ConfigurationNumber = 1,
- .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
-
- .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
-
- .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
- },
-
- .Audio_ControlInterface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 0,
- .AlternateSetting = 0,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 0,
-
- .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
- .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
- .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
-
- .ACSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
- .TotalLength = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
-
- .InCollection = 1,
- .InterfaceNumber = 1,
- },
-
- .Audio_StreamInterface =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
-
- .InterfaceNumber = 1,
- .AlternateSetting = 0,
-
- .TotalEndpoints = 2,
-
- .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
- .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
- .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
-
- .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
-
- .AudioSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.00),
-
- .TotalLength = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
- offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
- },
-
- .MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
-
- .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
- .JackID = 0x01,
-
- .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
-
- .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
- .JackID = 0x02,
-
- .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
-
- .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
- .JackID = 0x03,
-
- .NumberOfPins = 1,
- .SourceJackID = {0x02},
- .SourcePinID = {0x01},
-
- .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
-
- .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
- .JackID = 0x04,
-
- .NumberOfPins = 1,
- .SourceJackID = {0x01},
- .SourcePinID = {0x01},
-
- .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR
- },
-
- .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
- {
- .Endpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-
- .Refresh = 0,
- .SyncEndpointNumber = 0
- },
-
- .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
-
- .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01,
- .AssociatedJackID = {0x01}
- },
-
- .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
- {
- .Endpoint =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
-
- .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
- .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
- .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
- .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01
- },
-
- .Refresh = 0,
- .SyncEndpointNumber = 0
- },
-
- .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
- {
- .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
- .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
-
- .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01,
- .AssociatedJackID = {0x03}
- }
-};
-
-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
- * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
- * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
-};
-
-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
- * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- * Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = L"Dean Camera"
-};
-
-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
- * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
- * Descriptor.
- */
-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
-{
- .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
-
- .UnicodeString = L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
-};
-
-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
- * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
- * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
- * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
- * USB host.
- */
-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
-{
- const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
- const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
-
- const void* Address = NULL;
- uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
-
- switch (DescriptorType)
- {
- case DTYPE_Device:
- Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
- break;
- case DTYPE_Configuration:
- Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
- Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
- break;
- case DTYPE_String:
- switch (DescriptorNumber)
- {
- case 0x00:
- Address = &LanguageString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
- break;
- case 0x01:
- Address = &ManufacturerString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
- break;
- case 0x02:
- Address = &ProductString;
- Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
- break;
- }
-
- break;
- }
-
- *DescriptorAddress = Address;
- return Size;
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.10), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2048, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(00.01), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = 0x01, + .ProductStrIndex = 0x02, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .Audio_ControlInterface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 0, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 0, + + .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass, + .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass, + .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .ACSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.00), + .TotalLength = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), + + .InCollection = 1, + .InterfaceNumber = 1, + }, + + .Audio_StreamInterface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = 1, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass, + .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass, + .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General, + + .AudioSpecification = VERSION_BCD(01.00), + + .TotalLength = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) - + offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC)) + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded, + .JackID = 0x01, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External, + .JackID = 0x02, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded, + .JackID = 0x03, + + .NumberOfPins = 1, + .SourceJackID = {0x02}, + .SourcePinID = {0x01}, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External, + .JackID = 0x04, + + .NumberOfPins = 1, + .SourceJackID = {0x01}, + .SourcePinID = {0x01}, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = + { + .Endpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, + + .Refresh = 0, + .SyncEndpointNumber = 0 + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General, + + .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01, + .AssociatedJackID = {0x01} + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = + { + .Endpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM), + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x01 + }, + + .Refresh = 0, + .SyncEndpointNumber = 0 + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General, + + .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01, + .AssociatedJackID = {0x03} + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = L"LUFA MIDI Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h index 4f0eccab7..97c257fd6 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h @@ -1,87 +1,87 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for Descriptors.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
- #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM 2
-
- /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
- #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM 1
-
- /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
- #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
- * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
- * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
-
- // MIDI Audio Control Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_ControlInterface;
- USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
-
- // MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
- USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_StreamInterface;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
- USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
- USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
- USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
- } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
- const uint8_t wIndex,
- const void** const DescriptorAddress)
- ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
-
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // MIDI Audio Control Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_ControlInterface; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t Audio_ControlInterface_SPC; + + // MIDI Audio Streaming Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_StreamInterface; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t Audio_StreamInterface_SPC; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint8_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Doxygen.conf b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Doxygen.conf index 2f9fb688e..cf4845f48 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Doxygen.conf +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Doxygen.conf @@ -1,1565 +1,1565 @@ -# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Tone Generator Project"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
- "The $name widget" \
- "The $name file" \
- is \
- provides \
- specifies \
- contains \
- represents \
- a \
- an \
- the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
- *.c \
- *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \
- INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \
- PROGMEM
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED =
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Tone Generator Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, +# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English +# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, +# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, +# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses. +# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension. +# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag. +# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of +# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP, +# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat +# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran), +# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation +# rather than with sharp brackets. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. +# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. +# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. +# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. +# The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. +# Otherwise they will link to the documentation. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting +# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add. +# For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's +# filter section matches. +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help +# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents +# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML +# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of +# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as +# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have +# this name. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser). +# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list. + +USE_INLINE_TREES = NO + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript +# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should +# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine +# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index +# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup +# and does not have live searching capabilities. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for +# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the +# Makefile that is written to the output directory. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. +# This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. +# On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c index e1008a7d3..851db252b 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c @@ -1,245 +1,245 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h"
-
-/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
- * passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
- * within a device can be differentiated from one another.
- */
-USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
- {
- .Config =
- {
- .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
-
- .DataINEndpointNumber = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM,
- .DataINEndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
- .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false,
-
- .DataOUTEndpointNumber = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM,
- .DataOUTEndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
- .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false,
- },
- };
-
-/** 8-bit 256 entry Sine Wave lookup table */
-static const uint8_t SineTable[256] =
-{
- 128, 131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 146, 149, 152, 156, 159, 162, 165, 168, 171, 174,
- 176, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 193, 196, 199, 201, 204, 206, 209, 211, 213, 216,
- 218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 245,
- 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 252, 253, 254, 254, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255,
- 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 254, 254, 253, 252, 252, 251, 250, 249, 248, 247,
- 246, 245, 243, 242, 240, 239, 237, 236, 234, 232, 230, 228, 226, 224, 222, 220,
- 218, 216, 213, 211, 209, 206, 204, 201, 199, 196, 193, 191, 188, 185, 182, 179,
- 176, 174, 171, 168, 165, 162, 159, 156, 152, 149, 146, 143, 140, 137, 134, 131,
- 128, 124, 121, 118, 115, 112, 109, 106, 103, 99, 96, 93, 90, 87, 84, 81,
- 79, 76, 73, 70, 67, 64, 62, 59, 56, 54, 51, 49, 46, 44, 42, 39,
- 37, 35, 33, 31, 29, 27, 25, 23, 21, 19, 18, 16, 15, 13, 12, 10,
- 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 3, 2, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
- 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
- 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35,
- 37, 39, 42, 44, 46, 49, 51, 54, 56, 59, 62, 64, 67, 70, 73, 76,
- 79, 81, 84, 87, 90, 93, 96, 99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 118, 121, 124,
-};
-
-/** Array of structures describing each note being generated */
-static DDSNoteData NoteData[MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES];
-
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
- * setup of all components and the main program loop.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- SetupHardware();
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- sei();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
- if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
- {
- if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
- {
- DDSNoteData* LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[0];
-
- /* Find a free entry in the note table to use for the note being turned on */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
- {
- /* Check if the note is unused */
- if (!(NoteData[i].Pitch))
- {
- /* If a note is unused, it's age is essentially infinite - always prefer unused not entries */
- LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
- break;
- }
- else if (NoteData[i].LRUAge >= LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge)
- {
- /* If an older entry that the current entry has been found, prefer overwriting that one */
- LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
- }
-
- NoteData[i].LRUAge++;
- }
-
- /* Update the oldest note entry with the new note data and reset its age */
- LRUNoteStruct->Pitch = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2;
- LRUNoteStruct->TableIncrement = (uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * SCALE_FACTOR) +
- ((uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO * SCALE_FACTOR) *
- (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 - BASE_PITCH_INDEX));
- LRUNoteStruct->TablePosition = 0;
- LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge = 0;
-
- /* Turn on indicator LED to indicate note generation activity */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
- }
- else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
- {
- bool FoundActiveNote = false;
-
- /* Find the note in the note table to turn off */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
- {
- if (NoteData[i].Pitch == ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2)
- NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
- else if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
- FoundActiveNote = true;
- }
-
- /* If all notes off, turn off the indicator LED */
- if (!(FoundActiveNote))
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
- }
- }
-
- MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
- USB_USBTask();
- }
-}
-
-/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
-ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
-{
- uint16_t MixedSample = 0;
-
- /* Sum together all the active notes to form a single sample */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
- {
- /* A non-zero pitch indicates the note is active */
- if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
- {
- /* Use the top 8 bits of the table position as the sample table index */
- uint8_t TableIndex = (NoteData[i].TablePosition >> 24);
-
- /* Add the new tone sample to the accumulator and increment the table position */
- MixedSample += SineTable[TableIndex];
- NoteData[i].TablePosition += NoteData[i].TableIncrement;
- }
- }
-
- /* Output clamped mixed sample value to the PWM */
- OCR3A = (MixedSample <= 0xFF) ? MixedSample : 0xFF;
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Disable clock division */
- clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
- /* Hardware Initialization */
- LEDs_Init();
- USB_Init();
-
- /* Sample reload timer initialization */
- TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
- OCR0A = (VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 8);
- TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode
- TCCR0B = (1 << CS01); // Fcpu/8 speed
-
- /* Set speaker as output */
- DDRC |= (1 << 6);
-
- /* PWM speaker timer initialization */
- TCCR3A = ((1 << WGM31) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
- TCCR3B = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-
- /* Set speaker as output */
- DDRC |= (1 << 6);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-
- /* Disable any notes currently being played */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
- NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
-
- /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
- DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
-{
- bool ConfigSuccess = true;
-
- ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request event. */
-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
-{
- MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h" + +/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1, + + .DataINEndpointNumber = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, + .DataINEndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .DataINEndpointDoubleBank = false, + + .DataOUTEndpointNumber = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, + .DataOUTEndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank = false, + }, + }; + +/** 8-bit 256 entry Sine Wave lookup table */ +static const uint8_t SineTable[256] = +{ + 128, 131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 146, 149, 152, 156, 159, 162, 165, 168, 171, 174, + 176, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 193, 196, 199, 201, 204, 206, 209, 211, 213, 216, + 218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 245, + 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 252, 253, 254, 254, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, + 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 254, 254, 253, 252, 252, 251, 250, 249, 248, 247, + 246, 245, 243, 242, 240, 239, 237, 236, 234, 232, 230, 228, 226, 224, 222, 220, + 218, 216, 213, 211, 209, 206, 204, 201, 199, 196, 193, 191, 188, 185, 182, 179, + 176, 174, 171, 168, 165, 162, 159, 156, 152, 149, 146, 143, 140, 137, 134, 131, + 128, 124, 121, 118, 115, 112, 109, 106, 103, 99, 96, 93, 90, 87, 84, 81, + 79, 76, 73, 70, 67, 64, 62, 59, 56, 54, 51, 49, 46, 44, 42, 39, + 37, 35, 33, 31, 29, 27, 25, 23, 21, 19, 18, 16, 15, 13, 12, 10, + 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 3, 2, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, + 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, + 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, + 37, 39, 42, 44, 46, 49, 51, 54, 56, 59, 62, 64, 67, 70, 73, 76, + 79, 81, 84, 87, 90, 93, 96, 99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 118, 121, 124, +}; + +/** Array of structures describing each note being generated */ +static DDSNoteData NoteData[MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES]; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + sei(); + + for (;;) + { + MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent; + if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent)) + { + if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0)) + { + DDSNoteData* LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[0]; + + /* Find a free entry in the note table to use for the note being turned on */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + /* Check if the note is unused */ + if (!(NoteData[i].Pitch)) + { + /* If a note is unused, it's age is essentially infinite - always prefer unused not entries */ + LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i]; + break; + } + else if (NoteData[i].LRUAge >= LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge) + { + /* If an older entry that the current entry has been found, prefer overwriting that one */ + LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i]; + } + + NoteData[i].LRUAge++; + } + + /* Update the oldest note entry with the new note data and reset its age */ + LRUNoteStruct->Pitch = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2; + LRUNoteStruct->TableIncrement = (uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * SCALE_FACTOR) + + ((uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO * SCALE_FACTOR) * + (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 - BASE_PITCH_INDEX)); + LRUNoteStruct->TablePosition = 0; + LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge = 0; + + /* Turn on indicator LED to indicate note generation activity */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + } + else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Command == (MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF >> 4)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0)) + { + bool FoundActiveNote = false; + + /* Find the note in the note table to turn off */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + if (NoteData[i].Pitch == ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2) + NoteData[i].Pitch = 0; + else if (NoteData[i].Pitch) + FoundActiveNote = true; + } + + /* If all notes off, turn off the indicator LED */ + if (!(FoundActiveNote)) + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS); + } + } + + MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + uint16_t MixedSample = 0; + + /* Sum together all the active notes to form a single sample */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + /* A non-zero pitch indicates the note is active */ + if (NoteData[i].Pitch) + { + /* Use the top 8 bits of the table position as the sample table index */ + uint8_t TableIndex = (NoteData[i].TablePosition >> 24); + + /* Add the new tone sample to the accumulator and increment the table position */ + MixedSample += SineTable[TableIndex]; + NoteData[i].TablePosition += NoteData[i].TableIncrement; + } + } + + /* Output clamped mixed sample value to the PWM */ + OCR3A = (MixedSample <= 0xFF) ? MixedSample : 0xFF; +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + OCR0A = (VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 8); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS01); // Fcpu/8 speed + + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); + + /* PWM speaker timer initialization */ + TCCR3A = ((1 << WGM31) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP + TCCR3B = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + /* Disable any notes currently being played */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + NoteData[i].Pitch = 0; + + /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~(1 << 6); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); +} diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h index 62ac86165..27cb84dc9 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h @@ -1,108 +1,108 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for AudioOutput.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/wdt.h>
- #include <avr/power.h>
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
- #include <avr/interrupt.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
-
- #include "Descriptors.h"
-
- #include <LUFA/Version.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** Scale factor used to convert the floating point frequencies and ratios into a fixed point number */
- #define SCALE_FACTOR 65536
-
- /** Base (lowest) allowable MIDI note frequency */
- #define BASE_FREQUENCY 27.5
-
- /** Ratio between each note in an octave */
- #define NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO 1.05946
-
- /** Lowest valid MIDI pitch index */
- #define BASE_PITCH_INDEX 21
-
- /** Maximum number of MIDI notes that can be played simultaneously */
- #define MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES 3
-
- /** Number of samples in the virtual sample table (can be expanded to lower maximum frequency, but allow for
- * more simultaneous notes due to the reduced amount of processing time needed when the samples are spaced out)
- */
- #define VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE 512
-
- /** Sample table increments per period for the base MIDI note frequency */
- #define BASE_INCREMENT (((F_CPU / VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 2) / BASE_FREQUENCY))
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t LRUAge;
- uint8_t Pitch;
- uint32_t TableIncrement;
- uint32_t TablePosition;
- } DDSNoteData;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void SetupHardware(void);
-
- void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDI.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** Scale factor used to convert the floating point frequencies and ratios into a fixed point number */ + #define SCALE_FACTOR 65536 + + /** Base (lowest) allowable MIDI note frequency */ + #define BASE_FREQUENCY 27.5 + + /** Ratio between each note in an octave */ + #define NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO 1.05946 + + /** Lowest valid MIDI pitch index */ + #define BASE_PITCH_INDEX 21 + + /** Maximum number of MIDI notes that can be played simultaneously */ + #define MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES 3 + + /** Number of samples in the virtual sample table (can be expanded to lower maximum frequency, but allow for + * more simultaneous notes due to the reduced amount of processing time needed when the samples are spaced out) + */ + #define VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE 512 + + /** Sample table increments per period for the base MIDI note frequency */ + #define BASE_INCREMENT (((F_CPU / VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 2) / BASE_FREQUENCY)) + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t LRUAge; + uint8_t Pitch; + uint32_t TableIncrement; + uint32_t TablePosition; + } DDSNoteData; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt index 05b925906..6332a244e 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt @@ -1,73 +1,73 @@ -/** \file
- *
- * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
- * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
- */
-
-/** \mainpage MIDI Tone Generator Project
- *
- * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
- *
- * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
- *
- * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
- * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
- * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
- *
- * \section Sec_Info USB Information:
- *
- * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
- * <td>Device</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
- * <td>Audio Class</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
- * <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
- * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
- * USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
- * General MIDI Specification</td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
- * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- *
- * \section Sec_Description Project Description:
- *
- * MIDI note synthesiser project. This project implements a basic DDS frequency synthesiser, capable of producing 8-bit PWM sine
- * waves of variable frequency. When attached to a USB host, this project will allow for multiple MIDI notes to be synthesised into
- * audiable sound via PWM, using the notes sent to MIDI channel 1.
- *
- * Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare channel A. Decouple the audio output with a capacitor
- * and attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
- *
- * \section Sec_Options Project Options
- *
- * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
- *
- * <table>
- * <tr>
- * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
- * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
- * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
- * </tr>
- * <tr>
- * <td>MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES</td>
- * <td>MIDIToneGenerator.h</td>
- * <td>Sets the maximum number of MIDI notes that can be generated simultaneously. More notes require more processing time,
- * and thus a value that is too high will cause audiable sound distortion due to insufficient CPU time.</td>
- * </tr>
- * </table>
- */
-
+/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage MIDI Tone Generator Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Audio Class</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Standard Audio Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n + * USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n + * General MIDI Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * MIDI note synthesiser project. This project implements a basic DDS frequency synthesiser, capable of producing 8-bit PWM sine + * waves of variable frequency. When attached to a USB host, this project will allow for multiple MIDI notes to be synthesised into + * audiable sound via PWM, using the notes sent to MIDI channel 1. + * + * Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare channel A. Decouple the audio output with a capacitor + * and attach to a speaker to hear the audio. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td> + * <td><b>Location:</b></td> + * <td><b>Description:</b></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES</td> + * <td>MIDIToneGenerator.h</td> + * <td>Sets the maximum number of MIDI notes that can be generated simultaneously. More notes require more processing time, + * and thus a value that is too high will cause audiable sound distortion due to insufficient CPU time.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile index 8c7ceb0b3..943607ff5 100644 --- a/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile +++ b/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile @@ -1,727 +1,727 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb1287
-
-
-# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).
-ARCH = AVR8
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-#
-# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by
-# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
-# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
-# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
-# software delays.
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_USB = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = MIDIToneGenerator
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens
-LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0
-LUFA_OPTS += -D ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- Descriptors.c \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \
- $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=c99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list end
-
-clean_list :
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-checksource:
- @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
- if [ -f $$f ]; then \
- echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
- else \
- echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
- fi; done
-
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \
-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \
-debug gdb-config checksource
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation). +ARCH = AVR8 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# +# This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by +# F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value +# does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to +# reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate +# software delays. +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_USB = $(F_CPU) + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MIDIToneGenerator + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../.. + + +# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens +LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY +LUFA_OPTS += -D DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR=0 +LUFA_OPTS += -D ORDERED_EP_CONFIG +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 +LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1 +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile +include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=c99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) +CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) +ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL +CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS) +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CPPFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list end + +clean_list : + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +checksource: + @for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \ + if [ -f $$f ]; then \ + echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \ + else \ + echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \ + fi; done + + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean \ +clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ +debug gdb-config checksource diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf b/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf index 6ed9cc74d..5087ba31d 100644 --- a/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf +++ b/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf @@ -1,52 +1,52 @@ -; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
-
-[Version]
-Signature = "$Windows NT$"
-Class = Net
-ClassGUID = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
-Provider = %COMPANY%
-DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
-;CatalogFile = device.cat
-
-[Manufacturer]
-%COMPANY% = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
-
-; Decoration for x86 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTx86]
-%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00
-
-; Decoration for x64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
-%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00
-
-; Decoration for ia64 architecture
-[RndisDevices.NTia64]
-%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00
-
-;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
-[ControlFlags]
-ExcludeFromSelect=*
-
-; DDInstall section
-; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
-Characteristics = 0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
-BusType = 15
-; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
-include = netrndis.inf
-needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi
-AddReg = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
-
-; DDInstal.Services section
-[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
-include = netrndis.inf
-needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
-
-; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build
-; (part of the operating system).
-
-; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
-[Strings]
-COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature = "$Windows NT$" +Class = Net +ClassGUID = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318} +Provider = %COMPANY% +DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384 +;CatalogFile = device.cat + +[Manufacturer] +%COMPANY% = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64 + +; Decoration for x86 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTx86] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00 + +; Decoration for x64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTamd64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00 + +; Decoration for ia64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTia64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069&MI_00 + +;@@@ This is the common setting for setup +[ControlFlags] +ExcludeFromSelect=* + +; DDInstall section +; References the in-build Netrndis.inf +[RNDIS.NT.5.1] +Characteristics = 0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI +BusType = 15 +; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi +AddReg = Rndis_AddReg_Vista + +; DDInstal.Services section +[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services] +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services + +; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build +; (part of the operating system). + +; Modify these strings for your device as needed. +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Webserver"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c index 4399e9a7b..43d539f7a 100644 --- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c +++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c @@ -1,265 +1,265 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
-
-/** \file
- *
- * DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a
- * DHCP client on the network.
- */
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C
-#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
-
-struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection;
-
-uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8];
-
-/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */
-void DHCPServerApp_Init(void)
-{
- /* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */
- uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
-
- /* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
- struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
-
- /* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
- if (BroadcastConnection != NULL)
- uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
-
- /* Set all IP addresses as unleased */
- memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs));
-}
-
-/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
- * needs a UDP packet to be processed.
- */
-void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void)
-{
- DHCP_Header_t* const AppData = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
- uint16_t AppDataSize = 0;
-
- /* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */
- if (uip_newdata())
- {
- /* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */
- uint8_t DHCPMessageType;
- if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType)))
- return;
-
- uip_ipaddr_t Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP;
- struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress;
- uint32_t TransactionID;
-
- /* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */
- uip_getnetmask(&Netmask);
- uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
- memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
- TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID;
-
- /* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */
- if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP)))
- memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
-
- switch (DHCPMessageType)
- {
- case DHCP_DISCOVER:
- /* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */
- if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))
- DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP);
-
- /* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */
- AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
-
- /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */
- AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
- sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
- AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
- sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
-
- /* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */
- uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
- memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
- uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
- break;
- case DHCP_REQUEST:
- /* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */
- if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)))
- {
- /* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */
- AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
-
- /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */
- AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
- sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
- AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
- sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
-
- /* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */
- DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP);
- }
- else
- {
- /* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */
- AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID);
- }
-
- /* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */
- uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
- memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
- uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
-
- break;
- case DHCP_RELEASE:
- /* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */
- DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
- break;
- }
- }
-}
-
-/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
- * fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client.
- *
- * \param[out] DHCPHeader Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
- * \param[in] DHCPMessageType DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
- * \param[in] ClientHardwareAddress Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to
- * \param[in] PreferredClientIP Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated
- * \param[in] TransactionID Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with
- *
- * \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
- */
-static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
- const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
- const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
- const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
- const uint32_t TransactionID)
-{
- /* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
- memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
-
- DHCPHeader->Operation = DHCPMessageType;
- DHCPHeader->HardwareType = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
- DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
- DHCPHeader->Hops = 0;
- DHCPHeader->TransactionID = TransactionID;
- DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds = 0;
- DHCPHeader->Flags = 0;
- memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
- memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
- memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
- DHCPHeader->Cookie = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
-
- /* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
- DHCPHeader->Options[0] = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
- DHCPHeader->Options[1] = 1;
- DHCPHeader->Options[2] = DHCPMessageType;
- DHCPHeader->Options[3] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
-
- /* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
- return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
-}
-
-/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client.
- *
- * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address whose lease status should be checked
- *
- * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- *
- * \return Boolean true if the IP has already been leased to a client, false otherwise.
- */
-static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
- uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
- uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
- /* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */
- if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask))
- return false;
- else
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool.
- *
- * \param[out] NewIPAddress Location where the generated IP Address should be stored
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress)
-{
- uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr);
-
- /** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */
- for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++)
- {
- /* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */
- NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP;
-
- /* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */
- if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress)))
- return;
- }
-}
-
-/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be
- * allocated to another client unless it is first released.
- *
- * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as leased
- *
- * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
- uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
- uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
- /* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */
- LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask;
-}
-
-/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be
- * allocated to another client upon request.
- *
- * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as not leased
- *
- * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
- */
-static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
-{
- uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
- uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
-
- /* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */
- LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask;
-}
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** \file + * + * DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a + * DHCP client on the network. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C +#include "DHCPServerApp.h" + +struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection; + +uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8]; + +/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */ +void DHCPServerApp_Init(void) +{ + /* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */ + uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */ + struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT)); + + /* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */ + if (BroadcastConnection != NULL) + uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* Set all IP addresses as unleased */ + memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs)); +} + +/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack + * needs a UDP packet to be processed. + */ +void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void) +{ + DHCP_Header_t* const AppData = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata; + uint16_t AppDataSize = 0; + + /* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */ + if (uip_newdata()) + { + /* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */ + uint8_t DHCPMessageType; + if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType))) + return; + + uip_ipaddr_t Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP; + struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress; + uint32_t TransactionID; + + /* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */ + uip_getnetmask(&Netmask); + uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress); + memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr)); + TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID; + + /* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */ + if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP))) + memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + + switch (DHCPMessageType) + { + case DHCP_DISCOVER: + /* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */ + if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)) + DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP); + + /* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID); + + /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask); + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress); + + /* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */ + uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection); + memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + break; + case DHCP_REQUEST: + /* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */ + if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))) + { + /* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID); + + /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask); + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress); + + /* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */ + DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP); + } + else + { + /* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID); + } + + /* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */ + uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection); + memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + break; + case DHCP_RELEASE: + /* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */ + DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr); + break; + } + } +} + +/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required + * fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client. + * + * \param[out] DHCPHeader Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to + * \param[in] DHCPMessageType DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER + * \param[in] ClientHardwareAddress Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to + * \param[in] PreferredClientIP Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated + * \param[in] TransactionID Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with + * + * \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet + */ +static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress, + const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP, + const uint32_t TransactionID) +{ + /* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */ + memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + DHCPHeader->Operation = DHCPMessageType; + DHCPHeader->HardwareType = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET; + DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress); + DHCPHeader->Hops = 0; + DHCPHeader->TransactionID = TransactionID; + DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds = 0; + DHCPHeader->Flags = 0; + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr)); + DHCPHeader->Cookie = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE; + + /* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */ + DHCPHeader->Options[0] = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE; + DHCPHeader->Options[1] = 1; + DHCPHeader->Options[2] = DHCPMessageType; + DHCPHeader->Options[3] = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + /* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */ + return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4); +} + +/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address whose lease status should be checked + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + * + * \return Boolean true if the IP has already been leased to a client, false otherwise. + */ +static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */ + if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask)) + return false; + else + return true; +} + +/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool. + * + * \param[out] NewIPAddress Location where the generated IP Address should be stored + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress) +{ + uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr); + + /** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */ + for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++) + { + /* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */ + NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP; + + /* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */ + if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress))) + return; + } +} + +/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be + * allocated to another client unless it is first released. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as leased + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */ + LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask; +} + +/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be + * allocated to another client upon request. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as not leased + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */ + LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask; +} +#endif + diff --git a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h index 9d91d6be8..6f12e4b1e 100644 --- a/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h +++ b/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h @@ -1,63 +1,63 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.lufa-lib.org
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for DHCPServerApp.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
-#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <stdio.h>
-
- #include <uip.h>
-
- #include "../Webserver.h"
- #include "DHCPCommon.h"
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void DHCPServerApp_Init(void);
- void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void);
-
- #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C)
- static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
- const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
- const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
- const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
- const uint32_t TransactionID);
- static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
- static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress);
- static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
- static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
- #endif
-#endif
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2011 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DHCPServerApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_ +#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <uip.h> + + #include "../Webserver.h" + #include "DHCPCommon.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DHCPServerApp_Init(void); + void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C) + static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress, + const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP, + const uint32_t TransactionID); + static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + #endif +#endif + |